Sie sind auf Seite 1von 804

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System V100R003C03

Maintenance Guide (U2000)


Issue Date 01 2011-10-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 910 iManager U2000 Version V100R003C03 V100R006C00

Intended Audience
This document provides the guidelines to maintaining the OptiX RTN 910. It also describes the alarms and performance events that are required for troubleshooting during the maintenance. This document is intended for: l l l Network planning engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

About This Document

Convention { x | y | ... }*

Description Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This document is the first issue of the V100R003C03 product version.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................3 1.3 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................................................4 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.........................................................................................................................7 1.5 Storage Batteries.................................................................................................................................................7 1.6 Radiation.............................................................................................................................................................9 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.....................................................................................................................9 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.......................................................................................................................11 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas......................................................................................................................................11 1.6.4 Laser........................................................................................................................................................11 1.6.5 Microwave...............................................................................................................................................12 1.7 Working at Heights...........................................................................................................................................13 1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects...........................................................................................................................13 1.7.2 Using Ladders..........................................................................................................................................14 1.8 Mechanical Safety............................................................................................................................................16 1.9 Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................17

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations...........................................................................................19


2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.................................................................................................20 2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper...................................................................................................................22 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable.....................................................................................................................23 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board.....................................................................................................................24

3 Routine Maintenance..................................................................................................................25 4 Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................27


4.1 Definition of Emergency..................................................................................................................................28 4.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance...............................................................................................................28 4.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................28

5 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................35
5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure.................................................................................................................37 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions.............................................................................................................39 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.......................................................................................................................45 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services..................................................................................................53 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications.............................................................................................................59 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment............................................................................63 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment............................................................................66 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults..............................................................................................70 5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane..........................................................................76 5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels....................................................................................................................82 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services.......................................................................................................................86 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services.....................................................................................................................91 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs......................................................................................95 5.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults..................................................................................................................99

6 Part Replacement.......................................................................................................................102
6.1 Removing a Board..........................................................................................................................................104 6.2 Inserting a Board............................................................................................................................................106 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board..................................................................................................108 6.4 Replacing the PDH Interface Board...............................................................................................................109 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.......................................................................................................................110 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board..........................................................................................................111 6.7 Replacing the IF Board...................................................................................................................................112 6.8 Replacing the CF Card...................................................................................................................................114 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.............................................................................115 6.10 Replacing the Fan Board..............................................................................................................................116 6.11 Replacing the Power Board..........................................................................................................................118 6.12 Replacing the SFP........................................................................................................................................119 6.13 Replacing the ODU......................................................................................................................................121 6.14 Replacing the IF Cable.................................................................................................................................122

7 Database Backup and Restoration.........................................................................................124


7.1 NE Database...................................................................................................................................................125 7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually...............................................................................................................125 7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy...............................................................................................................126 7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup Policy...............................................................................................126 7.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the Device...............................................................................................127 7.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the Device..............................................................................................128 7.4 Restoring the Database...................................................................................................................................128

8 Supporting Task........................................................................................................................130
8.1 Hardware Loopback.......................................................................................................................................132 8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters.......................................................................................................132 8.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge Cleaners.....................................................................132 8.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens Tissue................................................................................134 8.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning Sticks.................................................................135 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events.....................................................................136 8.3.1 Checking the NE Status.........................................................................................................................136 8.3.2 Checking the Board Status....................................................................................................................137 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms......................................................................................................................137 8.3.4 Browsing Abnormal Events...................................................................................................................139 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events.................................................................................................140 8.3.6 Browsing History Alarms......................................................................................................................140 8.3.7 Browsing History Performance Events.................................................................................................141 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records...........................................................142 8.3.9 Browsing UAT Events...........................................................................................................................142 8.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs....................................................................143 8.3.11 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of Alarms.......................................................................144 8.3.12 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects........................................................................................144 8.3.13 Suppressing Alarms for NEs...............................................................................................................145 8.3.14 Reversing Alarms for Service Ports....................................................................................................145 8.3.15 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS Insertion.......................................................................................146 8.3.16 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ Insertion...................................................................................147 8.3.17 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service Ports....................................................................................147 8.3.18 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of Performance Events..................................................148 8.3.19 Setting Performance Thresholds..........................................................................................................148 8.3.20 Resetting Performance Registers.........................................................................................................149 8.4 Querying a Report..........................................................................................................................................149 8.4.1 Querying the Board Information Report ..............................................................................................149 8.4.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report ......................................................................150 8.4.3 Querying the Microwave Link Information Report...............................................................................150 8.4.4 Querying the Network-wide License Report.........................................................................................151 8.5 Software Loopback.........................................................................................................................................152 8.5.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board........................................................................152 8.5.2 Setting Loopback for the Tributary Board............................................................................................154 8.5.3 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing Board.......................................................................155 8.5.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board......................................................157 8.5.5 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board.............................................159 8.5.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board........................................................................................................161 8.5.7 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback Operations.........................................................................164 8.6 Reset...............................................................................................................................................................165 8.6.1 Cold Reset..............................................................................................................................................165 8.6.2 Warm Reset...........................................................................................................................................166 8.7 PRBS Test.......................................................................................................................................................166 8.7.1 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board.................................................................................166 8.7.2 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board.............................................................................................169 8.8 Querying the License Capacity.......................................................................................................................170 8.9 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser.............................................................................................................171 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

8.10 Setting the ALS Function.............................................................................................................................171 8.11 Setting the Automatic Release Function......................................................................................................172 8.12 Querying Power Consumption of Boards.....................................................................................................173 8.13 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel..................................................................................................173 8.14 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring.................................................................................174 8.15 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port.................................................................................................175 8.16 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports.......................................176 8.17 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports...................................177 8.18 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port..........................................................178 8.19 Using the Ethernet Test Frames....................................................................................................................178

A Alarm Reference.......................................................................................................................181
A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)...............................................................................................................182 A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)....................................................................................................202 A.2.1 CSTA....................................................................................................................................................203 A.2.2 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD/CSHE.....................................................................................................204 A.2.3 IF1.........................................................................................................................................................205 A.2.4 IFU2......................................................................................................................................................205 A.2.5 IFX2......................................................................................................................................................206 A.2.6 SL1D/SL1DA.......................................................................................................................................207 A.2.7 EM6T....................................................................................................................................................207 A.2.8 EM6TA.................................................................................................................................................208 A.2.9 EM6TB.................................................................................................................................................208 A.2.10 EM6F..................................................................................................................................................208 A.2.11 EM6FA...............................................................................................................................................209 A.2.12 EM4T..................................................................................................................................................209 A.2.13 EM4F..................................................................................................................................................210 A.2.14 EFP8...................................................................................................................................................210 A.2.15 EMS6..................................................................................................................................................211 A.2.16 SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................................................................212 A.2.17 AUX....................................................................................................................................................212 A.2.18 PIU......................................................................................................................................................212 A.2.19 FAN....................................................................................................................................................213 A.2.20 ISU2....................................................................................................................................................213 A.2.21 ISX2....................................................................................................................................................214 A.2.22 ML1/MD1...........................................................................................................................................214 A.2.23 MP1.....................................................................................................................................................215 A.2.24 EM6X.................................................................................................................................................216 A.2.25 ODU....................................................................................................................................................216 A.2.26 PMU....................................................................................................................................................217 A.2.27 TCU....................................................................................................................................................217 A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures..................................................................................................................217 A.3.1 A_LOC.................................................................................................................................................217 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.2 ALM_E1RAI........................................................................................................................................218 A.3.3 ALM_GFP_dCSF.................................................................................................................................219 A.3.4 ALM_GFP_dLFD.................................................................................................................................220 A.3.5 ALM_IMA_LIF....................................................................................................................................221 A.3.6 ALM_IMA_LODS...............................................................................................................................223 A.3.7 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE......................................................................................................224 A.3.8 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE......................................................................................................225 A.3.9 ALM_IMA_RFI...................................................................................................................................227 A.3.10 AM_DOWNSHIFT............................................................................................................................228 A.3.11 APS_FAIL..........................................................................................................................................229 A.3.12 APS_INDI...........................................................................................................................................230 A.3.13 APS_MANUAL_STOP......................................................................................................................232 A.3.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC..................................................................................................233 A.3.15 AU_AIS..............................................................................................................................................233 A.3.16 AU_LOP.............................................................................................................................................235 A.3.17 B1_EXC..............................................................................................................................................236 A.3.18 B1_SD.................................................................................................................................................238 A.3.19 B2_EXC..............................................................................................................................................240 A.3.20 B2_SD.................................................................................................................................................242 A.3.21 B3_EXC..............................................................................................................................................244 A.3.22 B3_EXC_VC3....................................................................................................................................247 A.3.23 B3_SD.................................................................................................................................................249 A.3.24 B3_SD_VC3.......................................................................................................................................251 A.3.25 BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................253 A.3.26 BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................254 A.3.27 BD_NOT_INSTALLED.....................................................................................................................255 A.3.28 BD_STATUS......................................................................................................................................256 A.3.29 BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL................................................................................................................258 A.3.30 BIP_EXC............................................................................................................................................260 A.3.31 BIP_SD...............................................................................................................................................261 A.3.32 BOOTROM_BAD..............................................................................................................................263 A.3.33 BUS_ERR...........................................................................................................................................264 A.3.34 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN...................................................................................................................266 A.3.35 CES_JTROVR_EXC..........................................................................................................................267 A.3.36 CES_JTRUDR_EXC..........................................................................................................................268 A.3.37 CES_LOSPKT_EXC..........................................................................................................................269 A.3.38 CES_MALPKT_EXC.........................................................................................................................270 A.3.39 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC.............................................................................................................271 A.3.40 CES_RDI............................................................................................................................................272 A.3.41 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC....................................................................................................................273 A.3.42 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT......................................................................................................274 A.3.43 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI.................................................................................................................274 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.44 CFCARD_FAILED............................................................................................................................275 A.3.45 CFCARD_OFFLINE..........................................................................................................................276 A.3.46 CHCS..................................................................................................................................................278 A.3.47 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE................................................................................................................279 A.3.48 COMMUN_FAIL...............................................................................................................................280 A.3.49 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT....................................................................................................................282 A.3.50 DBMS_ABNORMAL........................................................................................................................284 A.3.51 DBMS_ERROR..................................................................................................................................285 A.3.52 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE...............................................................................................................286 A.3.53 DCNSIZE_OVER...............................................................................................................................287 A.3.54 DDN_LFA..........................................................................................................................................288 A.3.55 DOWN_E1_AIS.................................................................................................................................289 A.3.56 DROPRATIO_OVER.........................................................................................................................290 A.3.57 E1_LOC..............................................................................................................................................291 A.3.58 E1_LOS..............................................................................................................................................292 A.3.59 ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL...............................................................................................................293 A.3.60 ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL.............................................................................................................294 A.3.61 ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................296 A.3.62 ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL...........................................................................................................297 A.3.63 ETH_APS_LOST...............................................................................................................................298 A.3.64 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH.......................................................................................................299 A.3.65 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL...............................................................................................................300 A.3.66 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH........................................................................................................301 A.3.67 ETH_CFM_LOC................................................................................................................................302 A.3.68 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE...................................................................................................................305 A.3.69 ETH_CFM_RDI.................................................................................................................................308 A.3.70 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI....................................................................................................................310 A.3.71 ETH_EFM_DF...................................................................................................................................313 A.3.72 ETH_EFM_EVENT...........................................................................................................................314 A.3.73 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK...................................................................................................................315 A.3.74 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT...................................................................................................................317 A.3.75 ETH_LOS...........................................................................................................................................318 A.3.76 ETH_NO_FLOW...............................................................................................................................319 A.3.77 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL..........................................................................................................321 A.3.78 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT.......................................................................................................322 A.3.79 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP....................................................................................................................324 A.3.80 ETHOAM_RMT_SD.........................................................................................................................325 A.3.81 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP...................................................................................................................327 A.3.82 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP.........................................................................................................328 A.3.83 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS...................................................................................................................330 A.3.84 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT.......................................................................................................331 A.3.85 EXT_SYNC_LOS..............................................................................................................................333 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.86 EXT_TIME_LOC...............................................................................................................................334 A.3.87 FAN_AGING.....................................................................................................................................334 A.3.88 FAN_FAIL.........................................................................................................................................335 A.3.89 FCS_ERR...........................................................................................................................................337 A.3.90 FLOW_OVER....................................................................................................................................338 A.3.91 HARD_BAD.......................................................................................................................................339 A.3.92 HP_CROSSTR...................................................................................................................................341 A.3.93 HP_LOM............................................................................................................................................342 A.3.94 HP_RDI..............................................................................................................................................343 A.3.95 HP_REI...............................................................................................................................................344 A.3.96 HP_SLM.............................................................................................................................................344 A.3.97 HP_TIM..............................................................................................................................................345 A.3.98 HP_UNEQ..........................................................................................................................................347 A.3.99 HPAD_CROSSTR..............................................................................................................................347 A.3.100 IF_CABLE_OPEN...........................................................................................................................349 A.3.101 IF_INPWR_ABN.............................................................................................................................350 A.3.102 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED..........................................................................................................351 A.3.103 IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN..............................................................................................................353 A.3.104 IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN.............................................................................................................354 A.3.105 IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH............................................................................................................355 A.3.106 IN_PWR_ABN.................................................................................................................................356 A.3.107 IN_PWR_HIGH...............................................................................................................................357 A.3.108 IN_PWR_LOW................................................................................................................................358 A.3.109 INTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL...............................................................................................................360 A.3.110 J0_MM..............................................................................................................................................361 A.3.111 K1_K2_M.........................................................................................................................................362 A.3.112 K2_M................................................................................................................................................363 A.3.113 LAG_BWMM...................................................................................................................................365 A.3.114 LAG_DOWN....................................................................................................................................366 A.3.115 LAG_MEMBER_DOWN................................................................................................................367 A.3.116 LAG_PORT_FAIL...........................................................................................................................369 A.3.117 LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL...................................................................................................................371 A.3.118 LAN_LOC........................................................................................................................................373 A.3.119 LASER_CLOSED............................................................................................................................374 A.3.120 LASER_MOD_ERR.........................................................................................................................375 A.3.121 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX.................................................................................................................376 A.3.122 LASER_SHUT.................................................................................................................................377 A.3.123 LCAS_FOPR....................................................................................................................................378 A.3.124 LCAS_FOPT....................................................................................................................................380 A.3.125 LCAS_PLCR....................................................................................................................................381 A.3.126 LCAS_PLCT....................................................................................................................................383 A.3.127 LCAS_TLCR....................................................................................................................................384 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.128 LCAS_TLCT....................................................................................................................................386 A.3.129 LCD..................................................................................................................................................387 A.3.130 LCS_LIMITED.................................................................................................................................389 A.3.131 LFA...................................................................................................................................................391 A.3.132 LICENSE_DIFF...............................................................................................................................392 A.3.133 LICENSE_LOST..............................................................................................................................396 A.3.134 LINK_ERR.......................................................................................................................................397 A.3.135 LMFA...............................................................................................................................................398 A.3.136 LOOP_ALM.....................................................................................................................................399 A.3.137 LP_CROSSTR..................................................................................................................................401 A.3.138 LP_R_FIFO......................................................................................................................................402 A.3.139 LP_RDI.............................................................................................................................................403 A.3.140 LP_RDI_VC12.................................................................................................................................404 A.3.141 LP_RDI_VC3...................................................................................................................................405 A.3.142 LP_REI.............................................................................................................................................406 A.3.143 LP_REI_VC12..................................................................................................................................407 A.3.144 LP_REI_VC3....................................................................................................................................408 A.3.145 LP_RFI.............................................................................................................................................409 A.3.146 LP_SLM...........................................................................................................................................410 A.3.147 LP_SLM_VC12................................................................................................................................410 A.3.148 LP_SLM_VC3..................................................................................................................................411 A.3.149 LP_T_FIFO.......................................................................................................................................412 A.3.150 LP_TIM............................................................................................................................................413 A.3.151 LP_TIM_VC12.................................................................................................................................414 A.3.152 LP_TIM_VC3...................................................................................................................................415 A.3.153 LP_UNEQ.........................................................................................................................................417 A.3.154 LP_UNEQ_VC12.............................................................................................................................418 A.3.155 LP_UNEQ_VC3...............................................................................................................................419 A.3.156 LPS_UNI_BI_M...............................................................................................................................420 A.3.157 LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT.................................................................................................................421 A.3.158 LPT_INEFFECT...............................................................................................................................422 A.3.159 LPT_RFI...........................................................................................................................................424 A.3.160 LSR_NO_FITED..............................................................................................................................425 A.3.161 LTI....................................................................................................................................................426 A.3.162 MAC_EXT_EXC.............................................................................................................................428 A.3.163 MAC_FCS_EXC..............................................................................................................................429 A.3.164 MOD_COM_FAIL...........................................................................................................................430 A.3.165 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH.............................................................................................................431 A.3.166 MPLS_PW_BDI...............................................................................................................................433 A.3.167 MPLS_PW_Excess...........................................................................................................................433 A.3.168 MPLS_PW_LOCV...........................................................................................................................434 A.3.169 MPLS_PW_MISMATCH................................................................................................................436 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.170 MPLS_PW_MISMERGE.................................................................................................................437 A.3.171 MPLS_PW_SD.................................................................................................................................438 A.3.172 MPLS_PW_SF.................................................................................................................................439 A.3.173 MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN.................................................................................................................440 A.3.174 MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI.....................................................................................................................441 A.3.175 MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess.................................................................................................................441 A.3.176 MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI.....................................................................................................................442 A.3.177 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV.................................................................................................................443 A.3.178 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH......................................................................................................445 A.3.179 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE.......................................................................................................446 A.3.180 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL..........................................................................................................446 A.3.181 MPLS_TUNNEL_SD.......................................................................................................................448 A.3.182 MPLS_TUNNEL_SF.......................................................................................................................449 A.3.183 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN.......................................................................................................450 A.3.184 MS_AIS............................................................................................................................................450 A.3.185 MS_CROSSTR.................................................................................................................................452 A.3.186 MS_RDI............................................................................................................................................453 A.3.187 MS_REI............................................................................................................................................454 A.3.188 MSAD_CROSSTR...........................................................................................................................455 A.3.189 MULTI_RPL_OWNER....................................................................................................................456 A.3.190 MW_AM_TEST...............................................................................................................................457 A.3.191 MW_BER_EXC...............................................................................................................................458 A.3.192 MW_BER_SD..................................................................................................................................462 A.3.193 MW_CFG_MISMATCH..................................................................................................................466 A.3.194 MW_CONT_WAVE........................................................................................................................467 A.3.195 MW_E1_LOST.................................................................................................................................468 A.3.196 MW_FEC_UNCOR..........................................................................................................................469 A.3.197 MW_LIM..........................................................................................................................................473 A.3.198 MW_LOF.........................................................................................................................................475 A.3.199 MW_RDI..........................................................................................................................................480 A.3.200 NESF_LOST.....................................................................................................................................481 A.3.201 NESOFT_MM..................................................................................................................................483 A.3.202 NESTATE_INSTALL......................................................................................................................486 A.3.203 NO_BD_SOFT.................................................................................................................................487 A.3.204 NP1_MANUAL_STOP....................................................................................................................488 A.3.205 NP1_SW_FAIL................................................................................................................................489 A.3.206 NP1_SW_INDI.................................................................................................................................490 A.3.207 NTP_SYNC_FAIL...........................................................................................................................491 A.3.208 OCD..................................................................................................................................................492 A.3.209 ODC_BATTERY_CURRENT_ABN..............................................................................................493 A.3.210 ODC_BATTERY_PWRDOWN......................................................................................................494 A.3.211 ODC_DOOR_OPEN........................................................................................................................497 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.212 ODC_FAN_FAILED........................................................................................................................498 A.3.213 ODC_HUMI_ABN...........................................................................................................................499 A.3.214 ODC_LOAD_PWRDOWN..............................................................................................................501 A.3.215 ODC_MDL_ABN.............................................................................................................................504 A.3.216 ODC_POWER_FAIL.......................................................................................................................505 A.3.217 ODC_SMOKE_OVER.....................................................................................................................508 A.3.218 ODC_SURGE_PROTECTION_FAIL.............................................................................................509 A.3.219 ODC_TEC_ALM.............................................................................................................................511 A.3.220 ODC_TEMP_ABN...........................................................................................................................512 A.3.221 ODC_WATER_ALM.......................................................................................................................514 A.3.222 OUT_PWR_ABN.............................................................................................................................515 A.3.223 OUT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL.........................................................................................................516 A.3.224 OUT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL.........................................................................................................518 A.3.225 PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT...............................................................................................................519 A.3.226 PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT..........................................................................................................520 A.3.227 PATCH_PKGERR...........................................................................................................................520 A.3.228 PG_LINK_FAIL...............................................................................................................................521 A.3.229 PG_PRT_DEGRADED....................................................................................................................522 A.3.230 PLA_CFG_MISMATCH.................................................................................................................523 A.3.231 PORTMODE_MISMATCH.............................................................................................................524 A.3.232 PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC....................................................................................................................525 A.3.233 PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE...........................................................................................................527 A.3.234 POWER_ABNORMAL...................................................................................................................528 A.3.235 POWER_ALM.................................................................................................................................529 A.3.236 PW_DROPPKT_EXC......................................................................................................................531 A.3.237 PWAPS_LOST.................................................................................................................................532 A.3.238 PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH.........................................................................................................532 A.3.239 PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL.................................................................................................................533 A.3.240 PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH.........................................................................................................534 A.3.241 R_F_RST..........................................................................................................................................535 A.3.242 R_LOC..............................................................................................................................................536 A.3.243 R_LOF..............................................................................................................................................537 A.3.244 R_LOS..............................................................................................................................................539 A.3.245 R_S_ERR..........................................................................................................................................541 A.3.246 RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF...........................................................................................542 A.3.247 RADIO_MUTE................................................................................................................................543 A.3.248 RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH............................................................................................................544 A.3.249 RADIO_RSL_HIGH........................................................................................................................545 A.3.250 RADIO_RSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................546 A.3.251 RADIO_TSL_HIGH.........................................................................................................................548 A.3.252 RADIO_TSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................549 A.3.253 RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL........................................................................................................549 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.254 RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE...........................................................................................................550 A.3.255 RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR.............................................................................................................551 A.3.256 RELAY_ALARM_MINOR.............................................................................................................552 A.3.257 RMFA...............................................................................................................................................553 A.3.258 RPS_INDI.........................................................................................................................................553 A.3.259 RS_CROSSTR..................................................................................................................................556 A.3.260 RTC_FAIL........................................................................................................................................557 A.3.261 S1_SYN_CHANGE.........................................................................................................................558 A.3.262 SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL...........................................................................................................559 A.3.263 SEC_RADIUS_FAIL.......................................................................................................................561 A.3.264 SECU_ALM.....................................................................................................................................562 A.3.265 SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD..................................................................................................................563 A.3.266 SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT..................................................................................................563 A.3.267 SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH..........................................................................................................564 A.3.268 SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH.....................................................................................................565 A.3.269 SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL..................................................................................................................566 A.3.270 SWDL_INPROCESS.......................................................................................................................567 A.3.271 SWDL_NEPKGCHECK..................................................................................................................567 A.3.272 SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT..............................................................................................................568 A.3.273 SWDL_PKGVER_MM....................................................................................................................569 A.3.274 SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL.............................................................................................................570 A.3.275 SYN_BAD........................................................................................................................................571 A.3.276 SYNC_C_LOS.................................................................................................................................572 A.3.277 T_ALOS...........................................................................................................................................573 A.3.278 T_F_RST..........................................................................................................................................574 A.3.279 T_LOC..............................................................................................................................................575 A.3.280 TEMP_ALARM...............................................................................................................................576 A.3.281 THUNDERALM..............................................................................................................................577 A.3.282 TR_LOC...........................................................................................................................................578 A.3.283 TU_AIS.............................................................................................................................................579 A.3.284 TU_AIS_VC12.................................................................................................................................581 A.3.285 TU_AIS_VC3...................................................................................................................................583 A.3.286 TU_LOP...........................................................................................................................................585 A.3.287 TU_LOP_VC12................................................................................................................................586 A.3.288 TU_LOP_VC3..................................................................................................................................587 A.3.289 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED.........................................................................................................589 A.3.290 UHCS................................................................................................................................................590 A.3.291 UP_E1_AIS......................................................................................................................................591 A.3.292 VC_AIS............................................................................................................................................592 A.3.293 VC_LOC...........................................................................................................................................594 A.3.294 VC_RDI............................................................................................................................................595 A.3.295 VCAT_LOA.....................................................................................................................................597 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.3.296 VCAT_LOM_VC12.........................................................................................................................598 A.3.297 VCAT_LOM_VC3...........................................................................................................................600 A.3.298 VCAT_SQM_VC12.........................................................................................................................601 A.3.299 VCAT_SQM_VC3...........................................................................................................................603 A.3.300 VOLT_LOS......................................................................................................................................604 A.3.301 VP_AIS.............................................................................................................................................605 A.3.302 VP_LOC...........................................................................................................................................607 A.3.303 VP_RDI............................................................................................................................................609 A.3.304 W_R_FAIL.......................................................................................................................................611 A.3.305 WRG_BD_TYPE.............................................................................................................................612 A.3.306 XPIC_LOS........................................................................................................................................613

B Abnormal Event Reference.....................................................................................................615


B.1 Major Abnormal Performance Event List......................................................................................................616 B.2 Abnormal Performance Events and Handling Procedures.............................................................................616 B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching.................................................................................................................616 B.2.2 N+1 Protection Switching.....................................................................................................................618 B.2.3 SNCP Switching...................................................................................................................................620 B.2.4 Linear MSP Switching..........................................................................................................................622 B.2.5 Status Change of an APS Protection Group.........................................................................................624 B.2.6 Reporting of PW APS Switching Events..............................................................................................626 B.2.7 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit............................................................................627 B.2.8 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit............................................................................628

C Performance Event Reference................................................................................................630


C.1 Performance Events (by Event Type)............................................................................................................631 C.1.1 SDH/PDH Performance Event List......................................................................................................631 C.1.2 Radio Performance Events....................................................................................................................634 C.1.3 Other Performance Events....................................................................................................................637 C.2 Performance Events (by Logical Board)........................................................................................................638 C.2.1 CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD/CSHE..........................................................................................638 C.2.2 IF1.........................................................................................................................................................639 C.2.3 IFU2/ISU2.............................................................................................................................................642 C.2.4 IFX2/ISX2.............................................................................................................................................646 C.2.5 SL1D/SL1DA.......................................................................................................................................650 C.2.6 EM6T....................................................................................................................................................652 C.2.7 EM6TA.................................................................................................................................................652 C.2.8 EM6X....................................................................................................................................................652 C.2.9 EM6F....................................................................................................................................................653 C.2.10 EM6FA...............................................................................................................................................654 C.2.11 EFP8....................................................................................................................................................654 C.2.12 EMS6..................................................................................................................................................655 C.2.13 SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................................................................657 C.2.14 MP1.....................................................................................................................................................658 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

C.2.15 ML1/MD1...........................................................................................................................................659 C.2.16 ODU....................................................................................................................................................660 C.3 Performance Events and Handling Procedures..............................................................................................661 C.3.1 AUPJCHIGH, AUPJCLOW, and AUPJCNEW...................................................................................661 C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW....................................................................................662 C.3.3 RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, and RSUAS..................................................................................663 C.3.4 RSOOF and RSOFS..............................................................................................................................665 C.3.5 MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, and MSUAS..............................................................................666 C.3.6 MSFEBBE, MSFEES, MSFESES, MSFECSES, and MSFEUAS.......................................................667 C.3.7 HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, and HPUAS.................................................................................668 C.3.8 HPFEBBE, HPFEES, HPFESES, HPFECSES, and HPFEUAS..........................................................670 C.3.9 IF_BBE, IF_ES, IF_SES, IF_CSES, and IF_UAS...............................................................................671 C.3.10 LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, and LPUAS..................................................................................672 C.3.11 LPFEBBE, LPFEES, LPFESES, LPFECSES, and LPFEUAS..........................................................673 C.3.12 E1_LCV_SDH, E1_LLOSS_SDH, E1_LES_SDH, and E1_LSES_SDH.........................................674 C.3.13 TSL_MAX, TSL_MIN, TSL_CUR, and TSL_AVG.........................................................................675 C.3.14 RSL_MAX, RSL_MIN, RSL_CUR, and RSL_AVG........................................................................676 C.3.15 FEC_BEF_COR_ER, FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT and FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT........................676 C.3.16 QPSKWS, QAMWS16, QAMWS32, QAMWS64, QAMWS128, and QAMWS256.......................677 C.3.17 ATPC_P_ADJUST and ATPC_N_ADJUST.....................................................................................678 C.3.18 FB_AMDCNT and FB_AMUCNT....................................................................................................679 C.3.19 RLHTT, RLLTT, TLHTT, TLLTT....................................................................................................680 C.3.20 TPLMAX, TPLMIN, and TPLCUR...................................................................................................680 C.3.21 RPLMAX, RPLMIN, and RPLCUR..................................................................................................681 C.3.22 BDTEMPMAX, BDTEMPMIN, and BDTEMPCUR........................................................................681 C.3.23 XPIC_XPD_VALUE..........................................................................................................................682 C.3.24 PG_IF_BBE, PG_IF_ES, PG_IF_SES, PG_IF_CSES, and PG_IF_UAS..........................................683 C.3.25 E1_BBE, E1_ES, E1_SES, E1_CSES, and E1_UAS.........................................................................684 C.3.26 IF_SNR_MAX, IF_SNR_MIN, and IF_SNR_AVG..........................................................................686 C.3.27 OSPITMPMAX, OSPITMPMIN, and OSPITMPCUR......................................................................686

D RMON Event Reference..........................................................................................................688


D.1 List of RMON Alarm Entries........................................................................................................................689 D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries on the Packet-Plane.............................................................................690 D.3 List of RMON Performance Entries on the EoS/EoPDH Plane....................................................................701 D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures......................................................................................................704 D.4.1 ETHDROP............................................................................................................................................704 D.4.2 ETHEXCCOL.......................................................................................................................................705 D.4.3 ETHLATECOL....................................................................................................................................706 D.4.4 RXBBAD..............................................................................................................................................707 D.4.5 TXDEFFRM.........................................................................................................................................708 D.4.6 ETHUNDER.........................................................................................................................................709 D.4.7 ETHOVER............................................................................................................................................710 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

Contents

D.4.8 ETHFRG...............................................................................................................................................710 D.4.9 ETHJAB...............................................................................................................................................711 D.4.10 ETHCOL.............................................................................................................................................712 D.4.11 ETHFCS.............................................................................................................................................713 D.4.12 ATMPW_LOSPKTS..........................................................................................................................714 D.4.13 ATMPW_MISORDERPKTS.............................................................................................................714 D.4.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS..........................................................................................................715 D.4.15 ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR........................................................................................................716 D.4.16 ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR..................................................................................................716 D.4.17 CES_MISORDERPKTS.....................................................................................................................717 D.4.18 CES_STRAYPKTS............................................................................................................................718 D.4.19 CES_MALPKTS................................................................................................................................718 D.4.20 CES_JTRUDR....................................................................................................................................719 D.4.21 CES_JTROVR....................................................................................................................................720 D.4.22 CES_LOSPKTS..................................................................................................................................720

E Alarm Management..................................................................................................................722
E.1 NE Alarm Management.................................................................................................................................723 E.2 Board Alarm Management.............................................................................................................................723 E.2.1 Setting the Alarm Severity....................................................................................................................723 E.2.2 Alarm Suppression................................................................................................................................723 E.2.3 Alarm Auto-Report...............................................................................................................................723 E.2.4 Alarm Reversion...................................................................................................................................724 E.2.5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm Threshold.............................................................................................724 E.2.6 AIS Insertion.........................................................................................................................................725 E.2.7 UNEQ Insertion....................................................................................................................................726

F Performance Event Management...........................................................................................727


F.1 NE Performance Event Management.............................................................................................................728 F.2 Board Performance Event Management.........................................................................................................728

G Alarm Suppression Relationship..........................................................................................729 H Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................733 I Glossary.......................................................................................................................................753


I.1 0-9....................................................................................................................................................................754 I.2 A-E..................................................................................................................................................................754 I.3 F-J....................................................................................................................................................................763 I.4 K-O..................................................................................................................................................................768 I.5 P-T...................................................................................................................................................................774 I.6 U-Z..................................................................................................................................................................783

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xviii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1
About This Chapter

Safety Precautions

This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. 1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices. 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. 1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD. 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. 1.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. 1.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. 1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects. 1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1.1 General Safety Precautions


This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

All Safety Precautions


To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device. The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.

Local Laws and Regulations


When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and regulations.

Basic Installation Requirements


The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation. l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device. Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot and maintain the device. Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or change the device or parts of the device (including software). The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety problems to the person in charge.

Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded. l l l l When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last. Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact. Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor. The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device, check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly grounded.

Human Safety
l l When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the cables. When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


NOTE

1 Safety Precautions

The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.

l l l

To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits. Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt by laser beams. Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches, to prevent electric shock and burn. In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building again in any situation.

Device Safety
l l l l Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as on a wall or in a rack. When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked. When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required. After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols


Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 910 and their meanings. Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 910 Symbol Indication This symbol is for ESD protection. A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear an ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board. Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

This symbol is for the laser class. A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it may damage you eyes or skin.

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Symbol

Indication A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is grounded.

ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY

A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should be cleaned periodically.

DON'T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVES BEFORE THEY SLOW DOWN !

This symbol is for fan safety. A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves should not be touched when the fan is rotating.

1.3 Electrical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD.

High Voltage

DANGER
l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal. l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or both.

Thunderstorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather conditions.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

High Leakage Current

WARNING
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device cannot be ensured. If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.

Power Cables

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. l l Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device. Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is correct.

Device with Power On

DANGER
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION
To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the ventilation plate of the subrack.

CAUTION
Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.

Fuse

WARNING
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the device.

Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations: physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time. Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.

Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas


This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

DANGER
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas. Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

1.5 Storage Batteries


This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGER
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar with the method of connecting a storage battery. l l l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any shortcircuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage. If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards. A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit, which leads to human injuries.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery: l l l l l Use special insulation tools. Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures. Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing electrolyte. When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or reversing the storage battery is prohibited. Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.

Short-Circuit

DANGER
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy. Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working battery before performing other operations.

Hazardous Gas

CAUTION
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device erosion. Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

Battery Temperature

CAUTION
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may overflow. When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60C, you need to check whether the electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Battery Leakage

CAUTION
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately. When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte: l l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal. If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital immediately.

1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers


The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers.

DANGER
When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

CAUTION
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface on the equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following special cleaning tools and materials: l l l l l l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin. Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton) Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent Special magnifier for fiber connectors

For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.

Replacing Optical Fibers


When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a protective cap.

Connecting Optical Fibers


l l l Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power damages the optical interface. Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the IN port instead of the OUT port. Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface. Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface

Slanting optical interface

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-3 Level optical interface

Level optical interface

1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure


This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

CAUTION
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

1.6.3 Forbidden Areas


The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range, the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction. A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden area.

1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

WARNING
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly without eye protection.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the eyes may be damaged. In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur, however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view an un-terminated optical fiber.

Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers


To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions: l l l l l l l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses. Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers. Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors. Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off. Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off. Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation. Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling


Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers: l l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers. Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.

1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

WARNING
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body. When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1.7 Working at Heights


This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

WARNING
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down. The requirements for working at heights are as follows: l l l l l The personnel who work at heights must be trained. Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling down. Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken. Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas. Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are intact.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects


This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.

WARNING
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects. l l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations. Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good condition. Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or wall with good weight-bearing capacity. Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations. Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using Ladders


This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Checking Ladders
l l Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder is in good condition, you can use the ladder. Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid overweighing the ladder.

Placing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent the ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points: l l l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two long sides. Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks. Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof, as shown in Figure 1-6. Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

1.8 Mechanical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

WARNING
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited. l l l l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet. Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by the splashing metal scraps. Wear protection gloves when drilling holes. Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling, clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

WARNING
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured by the sharp edges of the device.

Fans
l l When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device. When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards are damaged.

Carrying Heavy Objects


Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

WARNING
l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects. l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which may hurt you. l Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and move stably to avoid being strained. When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules, and boards.

1.9 Other Precautions


This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.

Removing and Inserting a Board

CAUTION
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. l l l Slide the board along the guide rails. Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage. When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors, or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables

CAUTION
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

1 Safety Precautions

l l

When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C. If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0C, transfer them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation. Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

WARNING
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the flag may exceed 70C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment, you must wear the protection gloves.

IF Cables

WARNING
Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

Notices for High-Risk Operations

About This Chapter


This chapter provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of microwave equipment. 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board. 2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch


The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.

Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch


The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU, as shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch
O: OFF

I : ON

Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch


1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.

2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Turn it to the left.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.

Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch


1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.

2.

Turn it to the right.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

3.

Release the toggle lever switch.

2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper


Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper. Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper. ----End

2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable


Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable. Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board


Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.

Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board. Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable. Step 3 Remove or install the IF board. ----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

3 Routine Maintenance

3
Maintenance Item

Routine Maintenance

Routine maintenance operations are performed to detect and rectify hidden faults before the hidden faults cause damage to equipment and affect services. Routine maintenance operations are preventive measures. For the OptiX RTN 910, routine maintenance items are classified into routine maintenance items carried out on the network management system (NMS), field maintenance items for indoor equipment, and field maintenance items for outdoor equipment.

Routine Maintenance Items Carried Out on the NMS


Recomm ended Mainten ance Cycle Every day Every day Every week Every week Every week Every week Every week Remarks

Checking the NE Status Browsing Current Alarms Browsing History Alarms Browsing Abnormal Events Browsing Current Performance Events Browsing History Performance Events Browsing History Transmit Power and Receive Power

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

3 Routine Maintenance

Maintenance Item

Recomm ended Mainten ance Cycle Half a year

Remarks

Testing IF 1+1 Switching

Applies only to the equipment that is configured in 1+1 protection mode. During the 1+1 protection switching, the protected services are interrupted. Hence, it is recommended that you perform the 1+1 protection switching when the traffic is light. Applies only to the equipment that is configured with N+1 protection.

Testing the IF N+1 Switching

Half a year

Field Maintenance Items for Indoor Equipment


Maintenance Item Checking the Telecommunications Room Maintaining the Environment of Outdoor Cabinets Recommended Maintenance Cycle Every two months Half a year Remarks -

Field Maintenance Items for Outdoor Equipment


Maintenance Item Recommended Maintenance Cycle Half a year Half a year Half a year Half a year Half a year Remarks

Checking the ODU Checking the Hybrid Coupler Checking the Antenna Checking the IF Cable Checking the LOS Condition

Carry out a complete check after a level-8 or higher hurricane, an earthquake, or other exceptional circumstances.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

4
About This Chapter

Emergency Maintenance

Emergency maintenance operations are performed in the case of emergencies or natural factors that may result in emergencies during the operation of the equipment. 4.1 Definition of Emergency For microwave equipment, an emergency refers to interruption of microwave services. 4.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance Emergency maintenance operations are performed to restore the services quickly. This is different from troubleshooting, whose purposes are to locate and rectify the faults. 4.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance The procedure for emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure for field troubleshooting.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

4.1 Definition of Emergency


For microwave equipment, an emergency refers to interruption of microwave services.

4.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance


Emergency maintenance operations are performed to restore the services quickly. This is different from troubleshooting, whose purposes are to locate and rectify the faults.

4.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance


The procedure for emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedure for field troubleshooting.
NOTE

In the case of emergency events, the customers in China can contact the 24-hour technical support center of Huawei at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Main Procedure for Emergency Maintenance


Figure 4-1 Main procedure for emergency maintenance
Start

Is there an incorrect operation? No

Yes Cancel the operation

Service interruoted by external causes?

Yes

Contact tealted departments to handle the problem

No Query NE status and alarms by using the NMS

NE access successful and alaarms cleared? No Rectify the fault on site

Yes Clear the alarm

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the service restored? Yes

Is the service restored?

No

Contact Huawei engineers

Yes 5 Check the troubleshooting result

End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Table 4-1 Description of the main procedure for emergency maintenance Comment No. 1 Description The common incorrect operations are as follows: l Modifying data configuration l Performing loopback operations l Shutting down the laser l Muting the ODU l Replacing boards/cables l Loading the software 2 3 Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices) The procedure is as follows: 1. Check the NE status. 2. If the NE is unreachable to the NMS, perform field troubleshooting according to Figure 4-2. If alarms are reported on the NE, browse the current alarms. 4 Generally, the following alarms can be cleared on the NMS: APS_MANUAL_STOP, APS_FAIL, BD_NOT_INSTALLED, DBMS_ERROR, ETH_APS_LOST, ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL, ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN, IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN, J0_MM, LOOP_ALM, LPS_UNI_BI_M, LP_SLM, LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ, NESOFT_MM, NESF_LOST, RADIO_MUTE, WRG_BD_TYPE, ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI, ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK, MW_CFG_MISMATCH. After the fault is rectified, proceed as follows: 1. Check the alarms, and ensure that the system is running properly. 2. Assign personnel to monitor the operation of the system during the peak service hour, ensuring that subsequent faults can be handled in time. 3. Fill in the field maintenance operation sheet, record the fault symptoms and troubleshooting results, and then send them to Huawei. Table 4-2 shows the field maintenance operation sheet.

Table 4-2 Field maintenance operation sheet Maintained on Actual Step Step in the Entire Procedure Maintained by Troubleshooting Result Remarks

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Maintained on Actual Step Step in the Entire Procedure

Maintained by Troubleshooting Result Remarks

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Field Troubleshooting Sub-Procedure


Figure 4-2 Field troubleshooting sub-procedure
Start

Obvious equipment Yes damage? No

Repair or replace the equipment

Is the PWR indicator on the PIU on?


2 Yes Browse alarms locally by using the LCT 3 Equipment alarm? No 4 Radio link alarm? No 5 Yes Yes

No

Troubleshoot the power input

Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm

High order path alarm?


No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Low order path alarm?


No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Faulty interconnection with SDH/PDH equipment?


No

Yes

7 Troubleshoot the inter-connection faulty 8

Packet service fault?


No

Yes

Troubleshoot the packet service fault

Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section

Proceed to the next step

No

Is the service restored?

Yes End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Table 4-3 Description of the field troubleshooting sub-procedure Comment No. 1 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the circuit breaker is automatically turned off, find the cause (such as short circuits or insufficient fuse capacity), and rectify the fault accordingly. 2. Check the power cables, especially the connectors of the power cables. If the power cables or connectors of the power cables are incorrect, replace the power cables or re-prepare the connectors of the power cables. 3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage or polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contact power engineers for troubleshooting.
NOTE The fuse capacity can be no less than 10A. The standard voltage of the input power is -48 V/-60 V and the permitted voltage ranges from -38.4 V to -72.0 V.

The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU. 2. Creating NEs by Using the Search Method. 3. Logging In to an NE. 4. Checking Alarms.
NOTE If you fail to log in to the created NE, ensure that the operations you performed are correct, and then locate and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the system control, switching, and timing board. For details about the indicators, see the OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description.

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HARD_BAD l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l IF_CABLE_OPEN l VOLT_LOS

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

4 Emergency Maintenance

Comment No. 4

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l PG_LINK_FAIL l PG_PRT_DEGRADED l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l R_LOS l R_LOF l R_LOC l MS_AIS l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B1_EXC l B2_EXC l MW_BER_EXC

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HP_LOM l B3_EXC l HP_UNEQ

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TU_AIS l TU_LOP l BIP_EXC l LP_UNEQ l T_ALOS l E1_LOC

7 8

See 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment or 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment. See 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults, 5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane, 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services, 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services, and 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5
About This Chapter

Troubleshooting

This guide describes the general troubleshooting procedure and the methods of rectifying the common faults. 5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. The customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices. 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault or a link fault. 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link When an NE reports MW_LOF, MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR due to failure or performance deterioration of a radio link, there is a radio link fault. 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services When an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board, regenerator section (RS), multiplex section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors in services. 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications When an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU) pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults. 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDH equipment. 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDH equipment. 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults An Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service deterioration.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane The Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDM network. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption and service degradation. 5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels This section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function or MPLS Ping/Traceroute function. 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services This section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded. 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services This section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded. 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs This section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs and transmitted in the PSN. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interrupted or deteriorate. 5.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure


When handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. The customers in China can contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

General Troubleshooting Procedure


Figure 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure

Start
1

Record the fault phenomena

Caused by external factors? No

Yes

Other troubleshooting procedures

Analyze fault causes and locate the fault

Is the fault rectified?


4

Yes

No Report to Huawei

Make a solution together

Attempt to rectify the fault

No

Is the service restored? Yes Observe the operation

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes Fill in the troubleshooting report

End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure Comment No. 1 Description When recording the fault phenomena, make a true and detailed record of the entire process of the fault. Record the exact time when the fault occurs and the operations performed before and after the fault occurs. Save the alarms, performance events, and other important information. You can use the click-to-collect function on the U2000 to collect data. Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices) If the fault is caused by the equipment, see 5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions. To provide feedbacks or obtain technical support, customers in China can contact the 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.

2 3 4

5.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions


The service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment fault or a link fault.

Fault Causes
l The operation is improper. The configuration data changes, the loopback is performed, the cable is replaced, or the board is replaced. l l The transmission NE or link is faulty. The interconnection is improper. If the transmission equipment functions normally and the connection is normal, check whether the interconnection between the transmission equipment is proper and whether the switch equipment is faulty.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. Check the operations before the service interruption to determine whether the service interruption results from an incorrect operation. Query alarms on the centralized NMS or the NMS that is used on the site, and then locate the fault based on the alarm analysis. If multiple NEs report alarms, analyze the alarms in the following order: equipment alarm, line alarm, higher order path alarm, and lower order path alarm. 3. If the fault cannot be located through the alarm analysis method, locate the fault by performing loopback section by section or replacing the corresponding parts.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

CAUTION
If the fault cannot be rectified immediately, restore the services quickly by adjusting the service route or performing a forced switching.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-2 General procedure for troubleshooting the service interruption
Start

Incorrect operation?

Yes

Cancel the operation

No

Service interrupted by external causes? No


Query NE status and alarms by using the centralized NMS

Yes

Contact related departments to solve the problem

NE access successful and alarms cleared? No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Rectify the fault on site

Proceed with the next step

No Service restored?

Yes

End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-2 Description of the general procedure for troubleshooting the service interruption Comment No. 1 Description The common incorrect operations are as follows: l Modifying the data configuration l Loopback l Shutting down the laser l Muting the ODU l Replacing the board or cable l Loading the software 2 3 4 Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables, environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices) For details, see 8.3.1 Checking the NE Status and 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms. Generally, the following alarms can be cleared on the NMS: APS_MANUAL_STOP, APS_FAIL, BD_NOT_INSTALLED, DBMS_ERROR, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, J0_MM, LOOP_ALM, LPS_UNI_BI_M, LP_SLM, LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ, NESOFT_MM, NESF_LOST, NESTATE_INSTALL, MW_CFG_MISMATCH, RADIO_MUTE, and WRG_BD_TYPE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Figure 5-3 Field troubleshooting sub-procedure


Start

Obvious equipment Yes damage? No

Repair or replace the equipment

Is the PWR indicator on the PIU on?


2 Yes Browse alarms locally by using the LCT 3 Equipment alarm? No 4 Radio link alarm? No 5 Yes Yes

No

Troubleshoot the power input

Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm

High order path alarm?


No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Low order path alarm?


No

Yes

Clear the alarm

Faulty interconnection with SDH/PDH equipment?


No

Yes

7 Troubleshoot the inter-connection faulty 8

Packet service fault?


No

Yes

Troubleshoot the packet service fault

Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section

Proceed to the next step

No

Is the service restored?

Yes End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-3 Description of the field troubleshooting sub-procedure Comment No. 1 Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the circuit breaker is automatically turned off, find the cause (such as short circuits or insufficient fuse capacity), and rectify the fault accordingly. 2. Check the power cables, especially the connectors of the power cables. If the power cables or connectors of the power cables are incorrect, replace the power cables or re-prepare the connectors of the power cables. 3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage or polarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contact power engineers for troubleshooting.
NOTE The fuse capacity can be no less than 10A. The standard voltage of the input power is -48 V/-60 V and the permitted voltage ranges from -38.4 V to -72.0 V.

The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU. 2. Creating NEs by Using the Search Method. 3. Logging In to an NE. 4. Checking Alarms.
NOTE If you fail to log in to the created NE, ensure that the operations you performed are correct, and then locate and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the system control, switching, and timing board. For details about the indicators, see the OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description.

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HARD_BAD l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l IF_CABLE_OPEN l VOLT_LOS

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 4

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l PG_LINK_FAIL l PG_PRT_DEGRADED l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l R_LOS l R_LOF l R_LOC l MS_AIS l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B1_EXC l B2_EXC l MW_BER_EXC

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l HP_LOM l B3_EXC l HP_UNEQ

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TU_AIS l TU_LOP l BIP_EXC l LP_UNEQ l T_ALOS l E1_LOC

7 8

See 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment or 5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment. See 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults, 5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane, 5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services, 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services, and 5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.

Experience and Summary


The maintenance personnel need to perform the routine maintenance operations periodically, to detect and rectify faults before the faults affect the services and thus to reduce the equipment fault rate.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link


When an NE reports MW_LOF, MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR due to failure or performance deterioration of a radio link, there is a radio link fault.

Context
The key to locating a radio link fault is to check whether the transmit power and the receive power are normal and whether there is an external interference. In the following two cases, the transmit power is abnormal. The first case is that the transmit power exceeds the range that the ODU supports. The second case is that the difference between the actual transmit power and the preset value is more than 2 dB when the ATPC is disabled. The relevant alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW TSL_CUR TSL_MAX TSL_MIN TSL_AVG
NOTE

For the range of the transmit power, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Product Description.

In the following two cases, the receive power is abnormal. In the first case, the receive power is lower than the normal value (Normal value = Planned value - 3 dB). In the second case, the receive power is lower than the receiver sensitivity or higher than the free space receive power due to fading. The relevant alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH RADIO_RSL_HIGH RADIO_RSL_LOW RSL_CUR RSL_MAX RSL_MIN RSL_AVG
NOTE

In the case of the radio link whose AM function is enabled, the receiver sensitivity is the specific receiver sensitivity at the guaranteed capacity. For details on the receiver sensitivity, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Product Description.

Generally, external interference is classified into co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

l l

Co-channel interference refers to crosstalk from two different radio transmitters that use the same frequency channel. Hence, the entire spectrum may be affected. Adjacent channel interference refers to signal impairment to one frequency, due to presence of another signal on a nearby frequency. Hence, a part of the spectrum is affected.

Interference is closely related to the frequency. Hence, the radio link may be faulty in one direction if interference exists on the radio link.

Fault Causes
Table 5-4 Causes of radio link faults Fault The transmit power is abnormal. The receive power is always lower than the normal value. Common Fault Cause The ODU is faulty. l The antenna direction is not adjusted properly. l The antennas have different polarization directions. l There is a mountain or building in the transmit direction. l The antenna is faulty or the connection between the antenna and the ODU is abnormal (for example, the waveguide interface of the ODU is wet or the flexible waveguide is not connected properly). l The ODU is faulty. The receive power is abnormal due to slow down fading. The receive power is abnormal due to fast fading. The receive power is normal or slow up fading occurs, but the signal-noise ratio (SNR) is abnormal. The fading margin is insufficient. The multipath fading is fast. There is external interference.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


NOTE

5 Troubleshooting

Based on the RSL, fading is classified into up fading and down fading. l Up fading The RSL is higher than the RSL in the free space. The difference can be 10-odd decibels. l Down fading The RSL is lower than the RSL after free space fading. The difference can be tens of decibels. Based on the fading time, fading is classified into fast fading and slow fading. l Fast fading The fading lasts from several milliseconds to tens of seconds. Generally, fast fading is caused by multipath fading. It occurs periodically. To be specific, fast fading occurs in the period from 18:00 to 20:00 of a day or in a certain season of a year. l Slow fading The fading lasts from tens of seconds to several hours. Generally, slow up fading is caused by interference. Slow down fading is caused by rain, and therefore is also called rain fading. Rain fading occurs on links working at a frequency of 10 GHz or in areas where heavy rain occurs. Generally, slow down fading and fast fading are caused by factors related to the transmission link. Hence, the radio link may be faulty in both directions in the case of slow down fading or fast fading.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check whether the ODU is muted, powered off, or looped back. Check whether the data configuration is correct. Check whether the ODU and the IF board are faulty. If the transmit power is abnormal, replace the ODU. If the receive power is abnormal, analyze and locate the causes according to the fading type. If the receive power is normal but the SNR is abnormal, check whether there is interference before you proceed. If the preceding methods cannot locate faults, perform loopback operations.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-4 Procedure for troubleshooting the radio link
Start

Incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

ODU or IF related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

Query the receive/transmit power and SNR

No Transmit power normal? Yes

4 Rectify the fault

RSL always lower than the normal value?


No

Yes

5 Rectify the fault

Slow down fading causes abnormal RSL?


No

Yes

6 Rectify the fault

Fast fading causes abnormal RSL?


No

Yes

7 Rectify the fault

Radio link faulty in one direction?


No 9 Perform loopback operations

Yes

8 Rectify the fault

Proceed to the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-5 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the radio link Comment No. 1 Rectify incorrect operations. Description Check the following points: l Check whether the ODU is powered off. l Check whether the ODU is muted. l Check whether the IF board is looped back. l Check whether the data configuration at the transmit end is the same as the data configuration at the receive end. l Check whether the data configuration matches the types of the ODU and the hybrid coupler. Pay special attention to the following alarms: 2 Rectify equipment faults. l VOLT_LOS l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l HARD_BAD l TEMP_ALARM l IF_INPWR_ABN l RADIO_MUTE l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l IF_CABLE_OPEN l MW_CFG_MISMATCH 3 Query the receive/transmit power, and the SNR 4 Troubleshoot the anomaly of the transmit power. Query the receive/transmit power, and the SNR in the latest one week. For details, refer to Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power and Querying the SNR Values of a Radio Link. Replace the ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 5 Troubleshoot the anomaly that the receive power is lower than the normal value.

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. If the receive power decreases sharply and does not recover, check the installation of the antenna. Ensure that the azimuth angle of the antenna meets the requirement. Check whether the antenna is aligned properly. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction is not aligned properly, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 2. If the difference between the receive power of the main ODU and standby ODU at one end of the 1+1 HSB radio link is beyond the range from 0 dB to 9 dB (in the case of an unbalanced hybrid coupler) or beyond the range from 0 dB to 5 dB (in the case of a balanced hybrid coupler), perform 1+1 HSB switching or replace the ODUs and hybrid coupler to narrow down the fault to a specific part. 3. If the difference between the RSL at the receive end and transmit end is larger than 10 dB, replace the ODUs to check whether the main or standby ODU is faulty. 4. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Rectify the wrong polarization direction. 5. Check whether the cable connector is made in accordance with specifications. If any cable connectors do not comply with the specifications, see the Installation Reference and remake cable connectors. 6. Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken, or pressed. If yes, replace the IF cable. 7. Check whether there is a mountain or building in the transmit direction. If the line of sight (LOS) is unavailable, adjust the height or position of the antenna. 8. Replace the ODUs and hybrid coupler to narrow down the fault to a specific part. 9. Check whether the gains of the antennas at the receive and transmit ends comply with the specifications. Replace the antenna whose gain does not comply with the specifications.

6 Troubleshoot slow down fading.

Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Increase the fade margin on links. l Use low-frequency ODUs. l Use vertical polarization instead of horizontal polarization.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 7 Troubleshoot fast fading.

Description Contact the network planning department to make the following changes: l Adjust the position of the antenna to reduce the multipath fading. 1. Adjust the height of the antennas at both ends to increase the height difference between the antennas. 2. In the case of strong reflection surfaces such as water surfaces, plains, and smooth mountaintops, adjust the antenna to remove reflection points. Alternatively, use the actual terrain to mask surface reflection. 3. Lower the antenna height to reduce the path margin with LOS conditions guaranteed. l Adjust the RF configuration to change the radio link to the 1+1 SD mode. l In the case of a 1+1 SD radio link, adjust the height difference between two antennas to ensure that the receive power of one antenna is higher than the receive power of the other antenna. l Increase the fading margin, by replacing the original antennas with antennas of a larger diameter or increasing the transmit power of the original antennas.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 8 Troubleshoot interference.

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. There is co-channel interference. 1. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. 2. Check the RSL at the local end. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect the long-term availability and performance of the system. 2. There is adjacent channel interference. 1. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. 2. Adjust the microwave working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing. 3. Decrease the receive frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. 4. Test and record the RSL. 5. Increase the receive frequency at the local end, with a step of 0.5 MHz or 1 MHz. Record the RSL accordingly until the receive frequency is equal to the original receive frequency plus a half of the channel spacing. 6. Compare the recorded RSL values, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range. 3. Use Huawei frequency scanning scripts or a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source. 4. Contact the network planning department to modify the networking planning and design. 1. Plan Tx high sites and Tx low sites correctly to avoid using them at the same time. 2. Plan frequencies or polarization modes correctly to avoid the same polarization direction for microwave signals and interference signals. Plan routes correctly. 5. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum.

9 Perform loopback operations to locate the fault.

The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Perform an inloop at the IF port. If the fault persists after the inloop is performed, replace the IF board. 2. Replace the ODU. If the fault is rectified after the ODU is replaced, it indicates that the ODU is faulty.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Experience and Summary


l l During the commissioning, ensure that the antenna is aligned properly, to prevent possible incipient faults. Periodically collect and analyze the data about the changes in the transmit power and receive power so that you can detect and then rectify the incipient faults accordingly in time.

5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services


When an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board, regenerator section (RS), multiplex section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors in services.

Fault Phenomena
The IF bit errors refer to the bit errors that the IF board detects through the self-defined overhead byte in the microwave frame. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l l MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_CFG_MISMATCH MW_LOF IF_BBE IF_ES IF_SES IF_CSES IF_UAS

The RS bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line processing unit or the IF board that works in SDH mode through the B1 overhead byte in the RS overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l B1_EXC B1_SD RS_CROSSTR RSBBE RSES RSSES RSCSES RSUAS
NOTE

The IF board that works in PDH mode may also detect the previous RS bit error alarms and performance events. In this case, the IF board detects bit error alarms and performance events in the PDH microwave frame through the self-defined B1 byte.

The MS bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line board detects through the B2 byte in the MS overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows:
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

l l l l l l l l

B2_EXC B2_SD MS_CROSSTR MSBBE MSES MSSES MSCSES MSUAS

The HP bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line processing unit or the IF board that works in SDH mode through the B3 byte in the HP overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l B3_EXC B3_SD HP_CROSSTR HPBBE HPES HPSES HPCSES HPUAS

The LP bit errors refer to the bit errors that the tributary board or IF board detects through the V5 byte in the VC-12 overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows: l l l l l l l l BIP_EXC BIP_SD LP_CROSSTR LPBBE LPES LPSES LPCSES LPUAS

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Causes
Table 5-6 Causes of bit errors Fault There are IF bit errors. Common Fault Cause l The radio link is faulty. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_LOF or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, the radio link is faulty. l The services are incorrectly configured. Check whether the MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported. If yes, the number of E1 services is inconsistent on both ends of the radio link. l The IF board at the local end or opposite end is faulty. There are RS bit errors. l The line is faulty. The common causes for bit errors on the optical line are as follows: the optical fiber line, the optical power is abnormal, the fiber performance deteriorates, or the fiber connector is not clean. In the case of bit errors on the radio link, check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, the radio link is faulty. l The line processing unit or IF board is faulty. l The clock unit is faulty. l The quality of the clock over the network declines. When the quality of the clock over the network declines, a pointer justification event occurs.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault There are not any RS bit errors but there are MS bit errors or HP bit errors.

Common Fault Cause l The line processing unit or IF board is faulty. l The quality of the clock over the network declines. When the quality of the clock over the network declines, a pointer justification event occurs. l The working temperature of the line processing unit or IF board is excessively high.

There are only LP bit errors.

l The tributary board is faulty. l The cross-connect unit is faulty. l The working temperature of the board is excessively high. l The working temperature of the crossconnect unit is excessively high. l There is a power surge or an external interference source, or the equipment is not properly grounded. (This cause does not need to be considered during the troubleshooting of an IF board.)

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Analyze the equipment alarms and performance events that are related to service configuration errors and bit errors. When there are many types of alarms and performance events on a service path, first analyze RS bit errors, then MS bit errors, HP bit errors, and finally LP bit errors. When multiple paths have bit errors, first check whether the overlapping part of the service paths is faulty. If you fail to locate the fault by analyzing the alarms and performance events, perform loopback operations section by section. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-5 Procedure for troubleshooting bit errors
Start

2
Is there an equipment alarm? No Yes Clear the alarm

3
Is there a pointer justification event? No Yes Troubleshoot the pointer justification SDH optical interface board

Troubleshoot RS bit errors on the SDH optical interface board

Is there an RS bit error alarm or a performance event?

Yes

If the alarming board is IF board

No

4
Troubleshoot RS bit errors on the IF board

Is there an MS/ HP alarm or performance event? No

5
Yes Troubleshoot MS/HP bit errors

6
Is there an LP alarm? No Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by section Yes Troubleshoot LP bit errors

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-7 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting bit errors Comment No. 1 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TEMP_ALARM l HARD_BAD l MW_CFG_MISMATCH 2 3 See 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications. The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the line board reports the B1_EXC, B1_SD, or RS_CROSSTR alarm. 2. Interchange the Tx fiber core and the Rx fiber core at both ends of the service path. If bit errors change after the exchange, it indicates that the fiber is faulty. Otherwise, the equipment at both ends of the service path is faulty. 3. In the case of a fiber fault, check whether the fiber between the equipment and the ODF and the section of the fiber that is led out of the telecommunications room are pressed. In addition, check whether the fiber connectors are clean. 4. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path, use a fiber jumper to loop back the optical ports. If the fault persists after the loopback, the line board may be faulty. 5. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path, you can also replace the board where the line unit is located or interchange between the board and another board of the same type that is working normally. If the alarm changes after the exchange, it indicates that the board is faulty. 4 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Check whether the IF board reports the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_LOF, RPS_INDI, B1_EXC, B1_SD, or RS_CROSSTR alarm. 2. If any of the alarms are reported, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link and rectify the fault. 3. If none of the alarms occurs, replace the IF board. 5 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Perform a loopback on the line board that reports the alarm. If the fault persists after the loopback, replace the line board. If the fault is rectified after the loopback, replace the line board at the transmit end. 2. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the line board, check whether there is a power surge or an external interference source or whether the equipment is not properly grounded.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 6

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Replace the board where the services are configured based on how the service paths that have bit errors overlap each other. 2. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the board, check whether there is a power surge or an external interference source or whether the equipment is not properly grounded.

Experience and Summary


NOTE

The TDM services mentioned refer to Native TDM services. The handling procedure applies when the STM-1e port. is faulty

l l

During the routine maintenance, check bit error performance events periodically and handle them in time. To locate a fault, prefer the method of analyzing alarms and performance events to the method of performing loopback operations and the method of replacing the parts.

5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications


When an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU) pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults.

Fault Phenomena
When the position of the first byte of the VC-4 in the AU-4 payload changes, the AU pointer makes a justification accordingly. The performance events related to the AU pointer justification are as follows: l l l AUPJCHIGH AUPJCLOW AUPJCNEW
NOTE

The AU pointer justification is made at an upstream NE but is detected and reported at a downstream NE.

When the service is configured to be at the VC-12 level, apply the reframing process to terminate the AU pointer justification. The terminating method is to transform the AU pointer justification into the TU pointer justification. The performance events related to the TU pointer justification are as follows: l l l TUPJCHIGH TUPJCLOW TUPJCNEW
NOTE

The TU pointer justification is made at the NE where the AU pointer is transformed into the TU pointer, but is detected and reported by the tributary board of the NE where services are terminated.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Causes
l l l l The clock sources or the clock source levels are configured incorrectly. As a result, there are two clock sources on the same network or a timing loop occurs. The fiber connections are incorrect. As a result, a timing loop occurs. The quality of the clock source declines, the clock unit is faulty, or there are other clockrelated faults. The tributary board is faulty (only for the TU pointer justification).

Fault Locating Methods


When there are both AU pointer justifications and TU pointer justifications on a service path, first handle the AU pointer justifications and then the TU pointer justifications. Fault AU pointer justification Fault Locating Method 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms. 2. Rectify the incorrect data configuration and incorrect fiber connections. 3. Change the clock configuration to locate the station whose clock is asynchronous with the entire network. 4. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones. TU pointer justification 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms. 2. Rectify the incorrect data configuration and incorrect fiber connections. 3. Change the clock and service configuration to locate the station whose clock is asynchronous with the entire network. 4. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-6 Procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications
Start

Is there a clock-related alarm? No Check the clock configuration

Yes

Clear the alarm

Incorrect configuration? No Check the fiber connection

Yes

Modify the data configuration

Incorrect fiber connection? No

Yes Reconnect the fibers

4
An AU pointer justification event? Yes Locate the NE whose clock is out of synchronization

5
Locate the faulty board

No

6
A TU pointer justification event? Yes Locate the NE whose clock is out of synchronization

7
Locate the faulty board

No

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified?

Yes End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-8 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications Comment No. 1 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l TEMP_ALARM l HARD_BAD l LTI l SYNC_C_LOS l S1_SYN_CHANGE l EXT_SYNC_LOS 2 Check the following points: l Check whether there are two clock reference sources on the entire network. l Check whether a timing loop is generated. 3 Query ECC routes to check whether the fibers are connected correctly. Check the fiber connections in the east and west directions of the NE that reports the pointer justification event. The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Locate a VC-4 channel that reports an AU pointer justification event. 2. Along the service source direction of the VC-4 channel, locate the source NE of the entire VC-4 service (not the source NE of a timeslot in the VC-4). 3. Set the clock of the source NE to the free-run mode. Set the other NEs to trace the clock of the source NE along the direction of the VC-4 service. 4. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the line board that is the first to report the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path. The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the remote NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the remote NE, and the clock unit of the remote NE, may be faulty. 5. Set the clock of the sink NE to the free-run mode. Set the other NEs to trace the clock of the sink NE along the direction of the VC-4 service. 6. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the line board that is the first to report the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path. The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty. 7. Compare the results and find out the common points. 5 Replace the possibly faulty boards.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 6

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: 1. Modify the service configuration to ensure that the NE where the clock reference source functions as the central NE and that the other NEs have the E1 services of the central NE. 2. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the NE that is the first to report the TU pointer justification event. The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty. 3. Modify the configuration data to ensure that all the NEs trace the clock along the other direction. 4. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the NE that is the first to report the TU pointer justification event. The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty. 5. Compare the results and find out the common points.
NOTE This method is also applicable to locating an AU pointer justification event.

Replace the possibly faulty boards. In the case of a TU pointer justification event, check whether the line board, the clock board, and the tributary board are faulty.

Experience and Summary


On a properly synchronized network, there are few pointer justifications (less than six per day on each port). Hence, monitoring the pointer of an SDH transmission system is an effective way to check the synchronization status of the system.

5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment


An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDH equipment.

Fault Causes
l The VC-12 numbering method of the OptiX equipment is different from the numbering method of the equipment of certain vendors. The OptiX equipment applies the timeslot numbering method. The numbering formula is: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12 number - 1) x 21. This method is also called as the method of numbering by order.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Certain equipment applies the line numbering method. The numbering formula is: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + TU-12 number. This method is also called as the interleaved method. l l The overhead bytes at both ends are inconsistent. The indexes of the SDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.
NOTE

In the case of interconnection with ATM or Ethernet equipment, the common cause for an interconnection failure is that the service is not set to the VC-4 pass-through service and thus the overheads are processed in the terminating mode instead of the pass-through mode.

Fault Locating Methods


Analyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment. Check the possible fault causes one after another.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-7 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDH equipment
Start

Is the interconnected equipment Yes the ATM/IP equipment? No Query the VC-12 numbering method of the interconnected equipment

Set the interconnection service to be the VC-4 passthrough service

Is the numbering mode the line numbering? No 1 Is there an overhead setting related alarm? No Is the interface the STM-1 electrical interface? 3 No

Yes

Modify the data configuration. Use the line numbering method to set the VC-12

Yes

Handle the alarm

2 Yes Check the grounding

Test the indexes of interfaces

Do the interfaces meet relevant standards? Yes

No

Handle the faults of the interconnected equipment

Go to the next step Handle the faults of the local equipment

No

Is the fault cleared? Yes

End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-9 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDH equipment Comment No. 1 Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l J0_MM l HP_TIM l LP_TIM l HP_SLM l LP_SLM 2 Check the following points: l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the equipment room are jointly grounded. l Check whether the shielding layer of the coaxial cable connector on the DDF is connected to the protection ground. l Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the same way.
NOTE Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment. Use a multimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the SDH equipment. In addition, measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the opposite equipment. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused by the grounding.

Common indexes of the optical interfaces are as follows: l Mean launched optical power l Receiver sensitivity l Overload optical power l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface Common indexes of the electrical interfaces: l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface l Allowed attenuation of the input interface

Experience and Summary


To rectify an interconnection fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics of the interfaces on the interconnected equipment.

5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment


An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDH equipment.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Causes
l l l l There is an impedance mismatch between interfaces. The equipment is not grounded properly. The cable performance deteriorates. The indexes of the PDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.

Fault Locating Methods


Analyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment. Check the possible fault causes one after another.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-8 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDH equipment
Start 1 Check the impedance of the interfaces

Is there an Yes impedance mismatch? No 2 Is the cable a coaxial cable? No 3 Check the cables Yes

Replace the cable or the tributary board

Check the grounding

Is in good conditions?

No

Adjust the cables

Yes Test the indexes of interfaces

Do the interfaces meet standards? Yes Troubleshoot the faults on the local equipment

No

Troubleshoot the faults on the interconnected equipment

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-10 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDH equipment Comment No. 1 2 Description Check the impedance of the E1 path. Ensure that the impedance of the E1 path is consistent with the cable type. Check the following points: l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the telecommunications room are jointly grounded. l Check whether the shielding layers of the coaxial cable connectors on the DDF are connected to the protection ground. l Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the same manner.
NOTE Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment sets. Use a multimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the PDH equipment and the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the equipment at the opposite end. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused due to the improper grounding.

Check the following points: l Check whether the wires of the cable are correctly connected. l Check whether the cable is broken or pressed. l Check whether the cable signal is interfered (for example, when the trunk cable is bound with the power cable, the cable signal is interfered by the power signal).
NOTE Checking the cables involves checking the cables from the DDF to the client side and checking the cables from the DDF to the transmission equipment side.

Check the following indexes: l Input jitter tolerance l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interface l Output jitter l Output frequency deviation

Experience and Summary


NOTE

The PDH services mentioned refer to Native E1 services.

In the case of interconnection with PDH equipment, improper grounding is the most common cause for an interconnection failure.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults


An Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet service deterioration.

Prerequisite
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted. The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example, the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data.

Fault Phenomena
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted. The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example, the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data. Table 5-11 Common faults of Ethernet services Symptom Ethernet services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, or BD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL, LAG_DOWN ETH_LOS, ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK, or LOOP_ALM LASER_MOD_ERR Ethernet services are degraded. HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM FLOW_OVER or LAG_MEMBER_DOWN AM_DOWNSHIFT EM6F, EM6X or EM4F EM4F, EM4T, EM6X, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T EM4F, EM4T, EM6X, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 or IFX2 Board EM6TB, EM4F, EM4T, EM6X, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F, EM6T

Fault Causes
l The possible human factors are as follows: An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports, such as the port enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet ports on the interconnected equipment. The service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l l The equipment at the local end is faulty. The line board is faulty or has bit errors. When the AM function is enabled, the Ethernet service bandwidth decreases due to the downward AM switch. The interconnected equipment is faulty. The network cable is faulty. The external electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. 3. Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-9 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
Start

Incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel this operation

An equipment alarm or alarm on the radio link? No

Yes

Clear the alarm

An Ethernet alarm? No

Yes

Clear the alarm

5 Query the port and service traffic and analyze the fault causes No 6 Any abnormal RMON performance events? No Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks section by section or replacing boards Yes

A loop formed by the E-LAN service trails? No

Yes

Release the loop

Troubleshoot the fault according to the flow of handling RMON performance events

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-12 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line l Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port, such as the port enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are the same as the parameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet service configuration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR 3 Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ETH_LOS l ETH_NO_FLOW l LAG_DOWN l LAG_MEMBER_DOWN l FLOW_OVER 4 Follow instructions in Detecting E-LAN Service Loops to check whether ELAN services are looped back. Release the loops if any are formed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 5

Description Query the rate of an Ethernet port and locate faults based on the analysis of Ethernet port rates. l If the Ethernet port connecting the peer equipment has a too high or too low receive rate, the peer equipment is faulty. l If the rate of the Integrated IP radio port approaches or reaches the license capacity of the IF port, the license capacity is too low and you need to apply for a license allowing for a higher capacity. l If the transmit rate of the Integrated IP radio port approaches or reaches the maximum Ethernet bandwidth of the IF port, the bandwidth of the IF port is too low and needs to be increased by the network planning personnel. l If the transmit rate of the Integrated IP radio port is much lower than the receive rate of the Ethernet port, or if the receive rate of the Integrated IP radio port is much higher than the transmit rate of the Ethernet port, the local end is faulty. Locate the fault as follows: Check the Ethernet service configuration and QoS configuration. By querying QoS packet loss data in RMON events on the NMS, check whether QoS settings are correct according to the packet loss data. Check the Ethernet interface board, IF board, and system control, switching and timing board by means of board replacement. If the transmitted traffic is equal to the received traffic, query the traffic on the same port in each VLAN to check whether bandwidth preemption occurs.

For RMON performance events, see the D RMON Event Reference.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Figure 5-10 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event


Start 1 View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port

Is there any FCS error? No Is there any collision or fragment? No Are broadcast packets excessive? No

Yes

Rectify the fault of line bit errors

Yes

Check the working mode of the port

Yes

Handle the problem on excessive broadcast packets

Use a meter to perform the test

Is the test passed? No 5 Is it a MTU setting problem? No Rectify the equipment fault by loopback section by section or replacing the board

Yes

Rectify the fault of the interconnected equipment

Yes

Modify the MTU value

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes

End

Table 5-13 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event Comment No. 1 Description 8.17 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports to obtain the real-time performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 2

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: l Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified, replace it with a new one. l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board. If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error, it indicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. Otherwise, the hardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end is faulty.

Check the following points: l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet port on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end, the Ethernet port must not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end.)

Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets (for example, you have set the loopback for the Ethernet interface board or set the VB filtering table incorrectly) and solve the problem. If the problem is caused on the equipment at the opposite end, set the threshold of broadcast packet suppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets. Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. The maximum frame length that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network.

Experience and Summary


To troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics, working mode, and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment.

5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane


The Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDM network. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption and service degradation.

Fault Phenomena
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted. The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example, the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrect packets exist in the received or transmitted data.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-14 Common faults of Ethernet services Symptom Ethernet services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, or BD_STATUS ALM_GFP_dLFD or ALM_GFP_dCSF ETH_LOS or LOOP_ALM LAG_PORT_FAIL, LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL, LCAS_TLCT, or LCAS_TLCR Ethernet services are abnormal. HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM FLOW_OVER LCAS_FOPT, LCAS_FOPR, LCAS_PLCT, or LCAS_PLCR Board EMS6/EFP8

Fault Causes
l The possible human factors are as follows: An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs. The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports, such as the port enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet ports on the interconnected equipment. The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS protocol is inconsistent on both ends of the link. The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of the link The service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l The equipment at the local end is faulty. The line board is faulty or has bit errors. The interconnected equipment is faulty. The network cable is faulty. The external electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

3.

Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-11 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
Start

1 1

Incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel this operation

2 An equipment alarm Yes or alarm on the radio link? No 3 An Ethernet alarm? No 4 A loop formed by the Yes E-LAN service trails? No 5 Any abnormal RMON performance events? No Fault on the opposite equipment? No Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks section by section or replacing boards Yes Yes Yes Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm

Query the port and service traffic and analyze the fault causes

Release the loop

Troubleshoot the fault according to the flow of handling RMON performance events

Troubleshoot faults on the opposite equipment

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes En d

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-15 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission line l Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port, such as the port enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are the same as the parameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment l The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS protocol is inconsistent on both ends of the link. l The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of the link. l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet service configuration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l R_LOS l R_LOF l MS_AIS l AU_AIS l AU_LOP l B1_EXC l B2_EXC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 3

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ETH_LOS l FLOW_OVER l ALM_GFP_dCSF l ALM_GFP_dLFD l FCS_ERR l LCAS_PLCT l LCAS_TLCT l LCAS_PLCR l LCAS_TLCR l LCAS_FOPT l LCAS_FOPR

If the LOOP_ALM alarm is reported after the configuring the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Interfaces operation is performed, it indicates that the network to which Ethernet ports are connected has loops. For RMON performance events, see C Performance Event Reference.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Figure 5-12 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event


Start 1 View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port

Is there any FCS error? No Is there any collision or fragment? No Is there any PAUSE frame? No Are broadcast packets excessive? No

Yes

Rectify the fault of line bit errors

Yes

Check the working mode of the port

4 Yes Handle the flow control problem or increase the bandwidth 5

Yes

Handle the problem on excessive broadcast packets

Use a meter to perform the test

Is the test passed? No 6 Is it a MTU setting problem? No Rectify the equipment fault by loopback section by section or replacing the board

Yes

Rectify the fault of the interconnected equipment

Yes

Modify the MTU value

Proceed with the next step

No

Is the fault rectified? Yes

End

Table 5-16 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event Comment No. 1 Description View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port to obtain the realtime performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 2

Description The troubleshooting procedure is as follows: l Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified, replace it with a new one. l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board. If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error, it indicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. Otherwise, the hardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end is faulty.

Check the following points: l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet port on the equipment at both ends are the same l Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end, the Ethernet port must not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end.)

Check the following points: l Whether the flow control method is the same. l Whether the Ethernet service traffic exceeds the bandwidth of the VCTRUNK.

Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets (for example, you have set the loopback for the Ethernet interface board or set the VB filtering table incorrectly) and solve the problem. If the problem is caused on the equipment at the opposite end, set the threshold of broadcast packet suppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets. Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. The maximum frame length that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network.

Experience and Summary


To troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics, working mode, and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment.

5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels


This section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function or MPLS Ping/Traceroute function.

Fault Phenomena
Common faults of MPLS tunnels are as follows.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

l l l

MPLS tunnels fail to be created, and services are unavailable. MPLS tunnels are faulty, and services are interrupted. MPLS APS switching fails, services are interrupted, and packet loss or bit errors occur.

Table 5-17 Common faults of MPLS tunnels Symptom MPLS tunnels are faulty. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS, MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL, MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV, MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess, MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH, MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE, MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN, MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI, MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI, MPLS_TUNNEL_SD, MPLS_TUNNEL_SF AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH MW_LIM MW_LOF Board CSHA, CSHB, CSHC, CSHD, CSHE

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed. The transmission link is looped back. Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. Service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l The local NE is faulty. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. The opposite NE is faulty. External electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the line is looped back, and whether any boards are replaced.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

2. 3. 4.

Handle the link alarms on the MPLS server trail. Locate the faulty section by using the LSP Traceroute function. Locate the fault by replacing boards.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-13 Procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels
Start

Any incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

Any equipment- or link-related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

3 Any alarm related to MPLS tunnel ? No Any fault of interconnection equipment No

Yes Clear the alarm

Yes Handle the fault

Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards

Contact Huawei technical engineers

No

Faults are rectified?

Yes

End

Table 5-18 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for E1 ports l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the parameter settings such as the working mode of Ethernet ports match those of the opposite NE l Whether the parameter settings such as frame format and frame mode at E1 ports match those of the opposite NE l Whether MPLS service configuration is correct, especially whether tunnel attributes are set correctly

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 2

Description Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN

Experience and Summary


Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of MPLS tunnels before troubleshooting MPLS tunnels.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

5.11 Troubleshooting CES Services


This section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded.

Fault Phenomena
CES services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. CES services are degraded if they have packet loss or incorrect packets. Table 5-19 Common faults of CES services Symptom CES services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS, CES_LOSPKT_EXC AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH CES services are degraded. HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, CES_JTROVR_EXC, CES_JTRUDR_EXC, CES_MALPKT_EXC, CES_MISORDERPKT_EX C, CES_STRAYPKT_EXC AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH CSHA, CSHB, CSHC, CSHD, CSHE, ML1, MD1, MP1 Board CSHA, CSHB, CSHC, CSHD, CSHE, ML1, MD1, MP1

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed. The transmission link is looped back. Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. Service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

The clock source is asynchronous. Jitters and delays on the network are too great. The local NE is faulty. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. The opposite NE is faulty. External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. Check whether the data is modified, whether the line is looped back, and whether any boards are replaced. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty, check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If the MPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same. If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent. Analyze the RMON performance events of CES services. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables are connected incorrectly. Replace Smart E1 processing boards.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-14 Procedure for troubleshooting CES services
Start

Any incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

Any equipment- or link-related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

3 Any alarm related to tunnels/PWs? No 4

Yes Clear the alarm

Any alarm related to CES services?

Yes Clear the alarm

Any alarm on E1 ports? No

Yes Clear the alarm

Any RMON performance event? No

Yes Handle the performance event

Any fault of interconnection with PDH equipment No

Yes Handle the fault

Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards

Contact Huawei technical engineers

No

Faults are rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-20 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting CES services Commen t No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Check whether the parameter settings of CES services, PWs, and tunnels are consistent at the source end and sink end. l Check whether the parameter settings of physical ports (including frame format, code, electrical port impedance, and overhead byte), are consistent. l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Commen t No. 3

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l CES_JTROVR_EXC l CES_JTRUDR_EXC l CES_LOSPKT_EXC l CES_MALPKT_EXC l CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC l CES_STRAYPKT_EXC

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l T_ALOS l UP_E1_AIS l LFA l LMFA l DOWN_E1_AIS l ALM_E1RAI

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l CES_MISORDERPKT l CES_LOSPKT l CES_MALPKT l CES_JTRUDR l CES_JTROVR l CES_STRAYPKT

Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Experience and Summary


Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of CES services before troubleshooting CES services.

5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services


This section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded.

Fault Phenomena
ATM services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. ATM services are degraded if they have packet loss or incorrect packets. Table 5-21 Common faults of ATM services Symptom ATM services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS, ALM_IMA_LIF, ALM_IMA_LODS, ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE, ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE, IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN, IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN, LCD AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH ATM services are degraded. HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, ALM_IMA_LIF, ALM_IMA_LODS, ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE, ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE, OCD AM_DOWNSHIFT MW_CFG_MISMATCH CSHA, CSHB, CSHC, CSHD, CSHE, ML1, MD1, MP1 Board CSHA, CSHB, CSHC, CSHD, CSHE, ML1, MD1, MP1

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2

Fault Causes
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Incorrect operations are performed.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

The transmission link is looped back. Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. Service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l The local NE is faulty. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. The opposite NE is faulty. External electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. Check whether the data is modified, whether the link is looped back, and whether any boards are replaced. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty, check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If the MPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same. If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent. Analyze the RMON performance events of ATM services. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables are connected incorrectly. Replace Smart E1 processing boards.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-15 Procedure for troubleshooting ATM services
Start

Any incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

Any equipment- or link-related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

Yes Any alarm related to ATM services? No 4 Any alarm at the E1 port? No 5 Yes Clear the alarm Clear the alarm

Any RMON performance event? No

Yes Handle the performance event

Any fault of interconnection with PDH equipment No

Yes Handle the fault

Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards

Contact Huawei technical engineers

No

Faults are rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-22 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting ATM services Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI, PWE3 CW, PW, and Tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink end. l Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent Whether E1 frame format, coding, overhead bytes, and E1 timeslot mode (30/31) are correctly configured Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version, clock mode, frame length, and maximum differential delay) are correctly configured l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 3

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ALM_IMA_LIF l ALM_IMA_LODS l ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE l ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE l IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN l IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN l OCD l LCD

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l T_ALOS l UP_E1_AIS l LFA l LMFA l DOWN_E1_AIS

Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS l ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR

Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.

Experience and Summary


Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of ATM services before troubleshooting ATM services.

5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs


This section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs and transmitted in the PSN. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interrupted or deteriorate.

Fault Symptoms
Ethernet services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. Ethernet services deteriorate if they have great delays, packet loss, or incorrect packets.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-23 Common faults of Ethernet services Symptom Ethernet services are interrupted. Alarm HARD_BAD, TEMP_ALARM, WRG_BD_TYPE, BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL, LAG_DOWN ETH_LOS, ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK, or LOOP_ALM LASER_MOD_ERR Ethernet services deteriorate. HARD_BAD or TEMP_ALARM FLOW_OVER or LAG_MEMBER_DOWN AM_DOWNSHIFT EM6FA, EM6F, EM6X or EM4F EM6TB, EM4F, EM4T, EM6X, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T EM6TB, EM4F, EM4T, EM6X, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 or IFX2 Board EM6TB, EM4F, EM4T, EM6X, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6F or EM6T

Fault Causes
l Incorrect operations are performed. The transmission link is looped back. Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end. Service configuration is incorrect. l l l l l The local NE is faulty. The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors. Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift. The opposite NE is faulty. External electromagnetic interference is severe.

Fault Locating Methods


1. 2. Check whether the data is modified, whether the link is looped back, and whether any boards are replaced. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty, check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If the MPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at both ends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same. If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent. Analyze the RMON performance events of Ethernet services. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables are connected incorrectly. Replace Ethernet interface boards.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-16 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services carried by PWs
Start

Any incorrect operation? No

Yes

Cancel the operation

Any equipment- or link-related alarm? No

Yes Clear the alarm

Yes Any alarm related to tunnels/PWs that carry services? No 4 Any alarm on the UNI side? No 5 Yes Clear the alarm Clear the alarm

Any RMON performance event? No

Yes Handle the performance event

Any fault of interconnection with PDH equipment No

Yes Handle the fault

Troubleshoot equipment faults by performing loopbacks on sections or replacing boards

Contact Huawei technical engineers

No

Faults are rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-24 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services carried by PWs Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 port l Whether a loopback is set for the transmission link l Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI, PWE3 CW, PW, and tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink end l Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent Whether E1 frame format, coding, overhead bytes, and E1 timeslot mode (30/31) are correctly configured Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version, clock mode, frame length, and maximum differential delay) are correctly configured l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic. 2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l BUS_ERR l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l RADIO_RSL_LOW l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l RADIO_TSL_LOW l IF_INPWR_ABN l AM_DOWNSHIFT l MW_CFG_MISMATCH Pay special attention to the following line alarms: l MW_LIM l MW_LOF l MW_BER_EXC l MW_BER_SD l MW_RDI l MW_FEC_UNCOR

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Comment No. 3

Description Pay special attention to the following alarms: l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess l MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI l MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH l MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE l MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL l MPLS_TUNNEL_SD l MPLS_TUNNEL_SF l MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN

Check the following points: l Whether the UNI-side performance of the faulty service is normal l Whether the working mode and tag attribute of the UNI are the same as those of its interconnected port Pay special attention to the following alarms: l ETH_LOS l ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI

5 6

For RMON performance events, see D RMON Event Reference. Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.

Experience and Summary


Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of Ethernet services carried by PWs before troubleshooting these services.

5.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults


If orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.

Fault Causes
l l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

The phone set is set incorrectly. The phone line is connected incorrectly. The orderwire is configured incorrectly. The orderwire unit is faulty. The system control unit is faulty. The line unit or radio link is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Fault Locating Methods


l l Check whether the phone set is set correctly, whether the phone line is connected correctly, and whether the orderwire is configured correctly. Replace the possibly faulty board to locate the fault.

Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-17 Procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults
Start

Check the phone setting

Is the phone correctly set? Yes

No

Modify the phone setting

Is the phone line correctly connected? Yes


2

No

Reconnect the phone line

Check the orderwire configuration

Is the configuration correct? Yes Replace the possibly faulty board

No

Modify the configuration

No Proceed with the next step

Is the fault rectified?

Yes

End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

5 Troubleshooting

Table 5-25 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults Comment No. 1 Description Check the following points: l Check whether the ring current switch "RING" on the phone set is set to "ON". l Check whether the dialing mode switch is set to "T", namely, the dual tone multi-frequency mode. l An orderwire phone set should be in on-hook state when it is not in communication, and the upper-right red indicator in the front view of the orderwire phone set should be off. If the red indicator is on, it indicates that the phone set is in off-hook state. Press the "TALK" button in the front of phone set to hook it up. In certain occasions, the maintenance personnel press the "TALK" button is pressed by mistake. As a result, the phone set stay in off-hook state all the time and the orderwire call from the other NEs cannot get through. 2 Check the following points: l Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are of the same length l Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are unique l Whether the overhead bytes of all the NEs on a subnet are the same l Whether the orderwire port is set correctly 3 Replace the boards where the orderwire unit, system control unit, and line unit are located to locate the fault.

Experience and Summary


To troubleshoot orderwire faults, you must check the orderwire phone periodically.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

6
About This Chapter
Background Information
Table 6-1 Part replacement description Part Name SL1D, SL1DA EMS6, EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6T, EM6F and EFP8 CSTA, CSHA, CSHB, CSHC, CSHE, and CSHD CF card SP3D and SP3S IF1, IFU2, ISX2, ISU2, and IFX2 PIU ML1 and MD1
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Part Replacement

Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. The replacement operation varies according to the specific part type.

Operation 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board

Tool l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover

6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board

6.8 Replacing the CF Card 6.4 Replacing the PDH Interface Board 6.7 Replacing the IF Board l ESD wrist strap l Screwdriver l U2000

6.11 Replacing the Power Board 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board
102

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Part Name FAN

Operation 6.10 Replacing the Fan Board

Tool l ESD wrist strap l U2000

ODU

6.13 Replacing the ODU

l Ejector lever (torque wrench) l U2000 l Silicon l Waterproof adhesive tape

Replacing the IF cable

6.14 Replacing the IF Cable

l Multimeter l Ejector lever l Electro-technical knife l File l Installation parts and accessories of the connector l IF cable l Waterproof adhesive tape

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

6.1 Removing a Board


Removing a board is a basic operation for replacing a board.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wrist strap. Figure 6-1 Wear the ESD wrist strap

Step 2 Optional: If cables are connected to the board, make labels for the cables and then remove the cables.
NOTE

Use fiber removers to remove fibers or network cables.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Figure 6-2 Tweezer fiber remover

Step 3 Remove the board. 1. Loosen the screws on the panel of the board. Figure 6-3 Removing a board (1)

2.

Hold the left and right ejector levers with hands. Push them outwards to disengage the board from the backplane.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Figure 6-4 Removing a board (2)

3.

Pull out the board gently along the slot guide rail. Figure 6-5 Removing a board (3)

CAUTION
Remove the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding.

Step 4 Put the removed board into the antistatic box or bag. ----End

6.2 Inserting a Board


Inserting a board is a basic operation for replacing a board.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wrist strap.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Figure 6-6 Wear the ESD wrist strap

Step 2 Insert the board. 1. 2. Hold the ejector levers on the panel with both hands. Push them outwards so that the angle between the ejector lever and the panel is about 45 degrees. Push the board gently along the slot guide rail until the board cannot slide further. Figure 6-7 Inserting a board (1)

CAUTION
Insert the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

3.

Press the two ejector levers inward with force. Figure 6-8 Inserting a board (2)

4.

Tighten screws on the panel. Figure 6-9 Inserting a board (3)

Step 3 Optional: If cables are connected to the board, recover the original cable connections according to the labels that are made previously. ----End

6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board


When the SDH optical interface board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are interrupted.

Prerequisite
l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

The spare SDH optical interface board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1. 2. Query the SNCP protection group. Perform the forced switching, if the port on the board functions as the current working channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, and the state of the current protection channel is normal or SD.

Step 3 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with linear MSP, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1. 2. Query the linear MSP group. Perform the forced switching, if the port on the board functions as the current working channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, and the state of the current protection channel is normal or SD.

Step 4 Remove the board. Step 5 Check whether the version and SFP type of the spare board are the same as the version and SFP type of the board to be replaced. Step 6 Insert the board. Step 7 After the board starts to work, check the STAT indicator on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board, release the forced switching. Step 10 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services, release the forced switching. ----End

6.4 Replacing the PDH Interface Board


When the PDH interface board is replaced, the services on the board are interrupted.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Prerequisite
l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Remove the board. Step 3 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 4 Insert the board. Step 5 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 6 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. ----End

6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board


When the Smart E1 board is replaced, the services on the board are interrupted.

Prerequisite
l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

ESD wrist strap Screwdriver


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board to be replaced. Step 2 Remove the board. Step 3 Verify that the spare board has the same board version and board type as the board to be replaced. Step 4 Insert the spare board. Step 5 After the substitute board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator is on and green.
NOTE

Smart E1 boards are hot-swappable. After the spare board is installed, it enters initialization state and starts to work 2 minutes later.

Step 6 Query the current alarms of the substitute board. There is no new alarm on the board. ----End

6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board


When the Ethernet interface board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are interrupted.

Prerequisite
l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection tunnel. 1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Querying MPLS APS Status.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

2.

If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 3 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection PW. 1. 2. Querying PW APS Status. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 4 Remove the board. Step 5 Check and ensure that the board version and the model of the SFP module on the spare board are the same as the board version and the model of the SFP module on the board to be replaced. Step 6 Insert the board.
NOTE

Ethernet interface boards are hot-swappable. After the substitute board is installed, it enters initialization state and starts working two minutes later. If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel, you need to change the static ARP table entries of the opposite NE.

Step 7 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services, release the forced switching. ----End

6.7 Replacing the IF Board


When the IF board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are interrupted.

Prerequisite
l l l l You must know the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1. 2. Query the SNCP protection group. If the port on the board functions as the current working channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, perform the forced switching.

Step 3 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with 1+1 protection, switch the service to the protection IF board. 1. 2. Query the IF 1+1 protection group. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 4 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with N+1 protection, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection IF board. 1. 2. Query the IF N+1 protection group. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 5 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection tunnel. 1. 2. Querying MPLS APS Status. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 6 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection PW. 1. 2. Querying PW APS Status. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.

Step 7 Optional: If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see Setting the ODU Transmitter State and mute the ODU at the opposite end. Step 8 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board to be replaced.

CAUTION
To turn off the ODU-PWR switch, you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and then set the switch to the "O" position. Step 9 Remove the board. Step 10 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. Step 11 Ensure that the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the spare IF board is turned off. Step 12 Insert the board. Step 13 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 14 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

CAUTION
To turn on the ODU-PWR switch, you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and then set the switch to the "I" position. IF boards are hot-swappable. After the substitute board is installed, it enters initialization state and starts working two minutes later. If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel, you need to change the static ARP table entries of the opposite NE. Step 15 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 16 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services, release the forced switching. Step 17 Optional: If the forced protection switching has been performed for the radio link, release the forced switching. Step 18 If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see Setting the ODU Transmitter State and unmute the ODU at the opposite end. ----End

6.8 Replacing the CF Card


all the services are interrupted during the replacement of the CF card.

Prerequisite
l l l l You must be aware of the impact of CF card replacement. You must know the specific position of the CF card to be replaced. You must be a user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher. You must obtain a spare CF card that has the same capacity as the CF card to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap U2000 Fiber remover

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Remove the board. Step 3 Remove the CF card according to the illustration in the following figure.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 4 Check the spare CF card. Step 5 Install the spare CF card according to the illustration in the following figure.

Step 6 Insert the board. Step 7 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should be on and green. Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms. ----End

6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board


All the services are interrupted during the period of replacing the system control switch and timing board.

Prerequisite
l l l l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Impact on System
The replacement of the System control Switch and Timing board results in service interruption.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000 Fiber remover

Context
NOTE

After the NE database is restored successfully, a cold reset is automatically performed on the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Replace the System control Switch&Timing board. 1. 2. Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to remove the board. Check whether the version of the spare board and the model of the SFP on the spare board are the same as the version of the board to be replaced and the model of the SFP on the board to be replaced. Remove the CF card from the original board and then install the CF card to the spare board. For details about how to install the CF card, see 6.8 Replacing the CF Card. Insert the spare board into the chassis. Press and hold the CF RCV button on the board for 8 seconds so that the board automatically restores the NE databases, system parameters, software packages, and NE logs from the CF card.
NOTE

3. 4. 5.

l In the process of restoring the NE database, the PROG indicator on the board blinks in green for about 11 minutes. l If the database restoration is successful, the NE resets automatically. After the NE resets successfully, the STAT and PROG indicator is on and green. l If the database restoration fails, the NE does not reset, and the PROG is red. In this case, contact Huawei technical support engineers for rectifying the fault.
NOTE

After the NE starts up normally, the STAT and PROG indicator on the board is green.

Step 3 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms. ----End

6.10 Replacing the Fan Board


The IDU cannot perform air cooling in the process of replacing the fan board. Therefore, you need to replace the fan board quickly.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Prerequisite
l l l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced. You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l ESD wrist strap U2000

Precautions

WARNING
Do not touch the blades until the fan has stopped rotating.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Move the cables away from the front panel of the fan board assembly. Step 3 Remove the fan board.

Step 4 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Step 5 Insert the standby fan board.

Step 6 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The FAN indicator should be on and green. Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms. ----End

6.11 Replacing the Power Board


All the services at the IDU are interrupted during the period of replacing the power board.

Prerequisite
l l l You must be aware of the impact of board replacement. You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced. The spare chassis must be made available, and the version and type of the spare chassis must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. The spare chassis must be made available, and the chassis is configured with the power board and the fan tray. You can query the board manufacturing information to learn about the version of the board to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Precautions

WARNING
Before replacing the board, you must turn off the power switch of the PDU. After inserting the PIU properly, turn on the power switch of the PDU. When removing the mounting ears of the chassis, hold the bottom of the chassis to prevent injury to human body or damage to other equipment caused by falloff of the chassis.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Take a record about the slot ID of each board and the mapping relations between the interfaces and cables so that the original wiring method is used after the board is replaced. Step 3 Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to turn off the output power switch on the power supply equipment. Step 4 Pull out other boards except for the power board and fan board. Step 5 Remove the mounting ears on the chassis and remove the chassis. (Skip this step when the chassis is installed on the desk.)

WARNING
When removing the mounting ears of the chassis, hold the bottom of the chassis to prevent injury to human body or damage to other equipment caused by falloff of the chassis. Step 6 See the OptiX RTN 910IDU Quick Installation Guide, install the spare chassis, and then reconnect the cables to the chassis according to the record. Step 7 Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to turn on the output power switch on the equipment. Step 8 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The PWR indicator should be on and green. ----End

6.12 Replacing the SFP


When the small form pluggable (SFP) is replaced, the unprotected services on the optical/ electrical port are interrupted.

Prerequisite
l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

You must know the impact of SFP replacement. You must know the specific position of the SFP to be replaced.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

l l

You must know the service protection and protection channels of the SFP to be replaced. The spare SFP must be available, and the version and type of the spare SFP must be the same as the version and type of the SFP to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the SFP to be replaced.

Context
NOTE

The CSHC, CSTA and SL1D can be equipped with the SFP to provide 2xSTM-1 optical or 2xSTM-1 electrical interfaces. The CSHC, CSHD, EM6F can be equipped with the SFP to provide 2xGE optical interfaces or 2xGE electrical interfaces.

Tools, Equipment and Materials


l l l ESD wrist strap Screwdriver U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board. Step 2 Optional: If SNCP is configured for services at the optical interface, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1. 2. Query the status of the SNCP group. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel, the protection channel does not involve the local board, and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state, perform forced switching.

Step 3 Optional: If linear MSP is configured for services at the optical interface, ensure that the services are already switched to the protection channel. 1. 2. Query the status of the linear MSP group. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel, the protection channel does not involve the local board, and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state, perform forced switching.

Step 4 Record the cable connections of the SFP, and then disconnect cables. Step 5 Check the types of the spare SFP and the SFP to be replaced, and remove the SFP module.
NOTE

When removing the SFP electrical module, press the blcak button first.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

1 2

1 2

Press the unclocking button. Remove the SFP electical module.

Step 6 Insert the standby SFP module and reconnect cables based on the record. Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms on the board. Step 8 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board, release the forced switching. Step 9 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services, release the forced switching. ----End

6.13 Replacing the ODU


When the ODU is replaced, the unprotected services on the ODU are interrupted.

Prerequisite
l l l You must know the impact of ODU replacement. You must know the specific positions of the ODU to be replaced and the IF board connected to the ODU. The spare ODU must be at hand, whose type must be the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l Ejector lever (torque spanner) U2000 Silicon Waterproof adhesive tape

Precautions
Before you replace an ODU that is installed on the coupler, power off the ODU to be replaced, but do not power off or mute the other ODU. Otherwise, the services may be affected. The interface of the coupler ejects little RF radiation, thus meeting the safety standards for microwave radiation.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

If the XPIC work group is configured for the IF board that is connected to the ODU to be replaced, the ODU at the opposite end of the XPIC work group needs to be muted.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms on the ODU and then record the results. Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 3 Remove the IF cable and the PGND cable from the ODU. Step 4 Remove the ODU. Option If... You need to remove the ODU with a waveguide interface You need to remove the ODU with a coaxial interface Description Then... Loosen the four latches of the ODU and disconnect the ODU from the antenna, the hybrid coupler, or ODU adapter. Remove the ODU from the post.

You need to remove the RTN XMC ODU Loosen the captive screws on the ODU and disconnect the ODU from the antenna, the hybrid coupler, or ODU adapter. Step 5 Ensure the type of the spare ODU is the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced. Step 6 Install the ODU. Option If... You need to install a new ODU with a waveguide interface You need to install a new ODU with a coaxial interface Description Then... See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide. See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide.

You need to install a new RTN XMC ODU See the RTN XMC ODU Installation Guide. Step 7 Connect the PGND cable and the IF cable to the ODU. Step 8 Waterproof the IF interface on the ODU. Step 9 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 10 After the ODU starts to work, check the ODU indicator and LINK indicator on the IF board. The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green. Step 11 Query the current alarms of the ODU. There should be no new alarms on the ODU. ----End

6.14 Replacing the IF Cable


When the IF cable is replaced, the unprotected services on the IF cable are interrupted.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

6 Part Replacement

Prerequisite
l l l You must know the impact of IF cable replacement. You must know the specific positions of the IF cable to be replaced and the IF board connected to the IF jumper. In the case of the RG-8U IF cable or the 1/2-inch IF cable, an IF jumper is required to connect the IF cable to the IDU and both ends of the IF cable should be terminated with type-N connectors. In the case of the 5D IF cable, the IF cable is connected directly to the IDU and the cable end connecting to the IDU should be terminated with the TNC connector and the cable end connecting to the ODU should be terminated with the type-N connector.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l l l l l Multimeter Ejector lever Electro-technical knife File Installation parts and accessories of the connector IF cable Waterproof adhesive tape

Procedure
Step 1 Query and record the current alarm of the IDU. Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 3 Disconnect the IF cable from the IF jumper and from the ODU. Step 4 Use a multimeter to test the connectivity of the IF cable to determine whether you need to make new connectors for the IF cable or replace the IF cable with a new one. If... You need to make new connectors for the IF cable Then... See the Installation Reference and make new connectors for the IF cable.

You need to replace the IF cable with a new Replace the IF cable with a new one. one Step 5 Connect the IF cable to the IF jumper and to the ODU. Step 6 Waterproof the connectors at the two ends of the IF cable with the waterproof adhesive tape. Step 7 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board. Step 8 After the ODU starts to work, check the ODU and LINK indicators on the IF board. The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green. Step 9 Query the current alarms of the IDU. There should be no new alarms on the IDU. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Database Backup and Restoration

About This Chapter


The OptiX RTN 910 supports database backup and restoration through the NMS. 7.1 NE Database An NE database stores the communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, and configuration data of an NE in a certain structure to facilitate the relevant query and modification, hence ensuring that the data can be restored after the NE is reset. 7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually The NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database from being damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, crossconnect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the database on a regular basis and before performing any risk operation. 7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy You can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backing up the database. 7.4 Restoring the Database If the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that are saved previously.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

7.1 NE Database
An NE database stores the communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, and configuration data of an NE in a certain structure to facilitate the relevant query and modification, hence ensuring that the data can be restored after the NE is reset. An NE database includes the following types: l Memory database (MDB) The data in the MDB varies according to the configuration and is lost when the system control unit is reset or when the NE is powered off. l Dynamic random database (DRDB) The DRDB automatically stores the data that is checked successfully. The DRDB is resident in the reserved memory. Hence, the data in the DRDB is not lost when a warm reset is performed on the system control unit. The data, however, is lost when a cold reset is performed on the system control unit or when the NE is powered off. l Flash database (FDB) The FDB includes FDB0 and FDB1. The FDB is resident in the flash memory on the board. Hence, the data in the FDB is permanently stored. After being delivered to the system control unit, the NE configuration data is stored in the MDB. After checking the NE configuration data successfully, the system control unit automatically copies the data from the MDB to the DRDB and delivers the board configuration data generated after successful check to the relevant board. The NE backs up the DRDB database into the FDB0 and FDB1 databases of the flash memory at an interval of 30 minutes. After the NE is restarted because of power-off, the system control unit checks whether the configuration data in the DRDB is available. If yes, the system control unit restores the data. If the configuration data in the DRDB is damaged, the system control unit restores the data from FDB0 or FDB1. On the CF card, NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored. After the CRV button on the system control, switching and timing board is pressed and held for 8 seconds, the data stored on the CF card is loaded to the board. To synchronize the data on the CF card with the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching and timing board, the regular backup function needs to be enabled. By default, the data is backed up every 24 hours.
NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are updated with those on the system control, switching and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, no automatic or manual operation is performed to synchronize the software packages. The system control, switching and timing board and the CF card must have same software packages. If they have different software packages, the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported.

7.2 Backing Up the Database Manually


The NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database from being damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, crossIssue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

connect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the database on a regular basis and before performing any risk operation.

Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. You must log in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/ Restoration from the Main Menu. Step 2 In NE View, click Find. Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions and search for the NE that requires database backup. Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Click Backup.
NOTE

Press and hold the Ctrl button on the keyboard, you can select multiple NEs to back up the data at one time.

Step 6 Set the data backup path to NMS Server or NMS Client according to the requirements. Step 7 Click Start to start backing up the NE data. In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of backing up the data. After the data backup is successful, Operation Status displays a message, indicating that the operation is successful. ----End

7.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy


You can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backing up the database.

7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup Policy


Through this task, you can set the backup policy for a specific NE.

Prerequisite
l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. You must log in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Background Information
Each NE has a default data backup policy. l l l l Database packages are backed up once at 2:00. The default backup policy is disabled by default. A maximum of five database packages can be backed up at a time. Data changes do not trigger any backup operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the Main Menu. Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type. The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed. Step 3 Click New Policy. Step 4 Optional: Click Step 5 Optional: Click to import the information of the NEs. to export the information of the NEs.

The information of the selected NEs is stored in the specified location. Step 6 In NE Table, select one or more NEs. Step 7 Click Next. Then, the Setting Policy dialog box is displayed. Step 8 Set Policy Name, Period Backup Policy, and Period Save Policy.
NOTE

l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Enable, the NMS performs the backup operation within the specified period, day, and time. l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Disable, the backup policy is still in the Disable state although the policy period reaches the specified period, day, and time.

Step 9 Click Advanced Settings, and set Backup Type, Max Backup Num, and Configuration Change Backup for a certain type of NEs. Step 10 Click OK. Step 11 Click OK. ----End

7.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the Device


Through this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the running state.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the Main Menu. Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type. The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed. Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Enable Backup Policy. ----End

7.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the Device


Through this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the suspended state.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the Main Menu. Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type. The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed. Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Disable Backup Policy. ----End

7.4 Restoring the Database


If the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that are saved previously.

Prerequisite
l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The data to be restored must be backed up. You must log in to the NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

7 Database Backup and Restoration

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/ Restoration from the Main Menu. The NE Data Backup/Restoration window is displayed. Step 2 In NE View, click Find. Then, the Find NE dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions to search for the NEs that need to restore databases. Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Select the NE whose data needs to be recovered, and click Recover.
NOTE

You can select multiple NEs to recover the data at one time.

Then, the Recover dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Select Browse in File Name. Then, the Select File dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Select files from NMS Server or NMS Client, and then choose the files to be recovered. Click OK. Step 8 In the Recover dialog box, click Start. Step 9 Click Yes in the prompt dialog box. The system starts recovering the selected data files on the specified NE. In the NE list of NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of recovering the data. After the data is recovered, Operation Status displays a message, indicating that the operation is successful. Step 10 In NE View, right-click the NE and choose Active Database from the shortcut menu. The Active Database dialog box is displayed. Step 11 Click Start to start activating the database.
NOTE

If the NE transmits data services, select Deliver to Board. Services are interrupted during the activation of databases.

In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of activating the database. After the database is activated, Operation Status indicates that the operation is successful. ----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8
About This Chapter

Supporting Task

This chapter describes the common maintenance operations. 8.1 Hardware Loopback Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical connection. 8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are terminated need to be cleaned in time. 8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events The U2000 is used to browse alarms, abnormal events, and performance events at the network layer. 8.4 Querying a Report You can obtain the version, manufacture, and microwave link information of all the boards by querying the corresponding report. 8.5 Software Loopback Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS. During software loopback, you need not visit the engineering site. Hence, software loopback is used more widely than hardware loopback. 8.6 Reset Reset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. Reset is classified into cold reset, warm reset. 8.7 PRBS Test The pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method of network maintenance and self-check. 8.8 Querying the License Capacity You can check whether the loaded license file meets the requirements by querying the license capacity.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.9 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser When performing operations such as testing a fiber cut, you can set the on/off state of the laser rather than removing and re-inserting the optical fiber on site. 8.10 Setting the ALS Function The SDH optical interface board supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. This function enables the board to turn off a laser when the board does not transmit services, the optical fiber is faulty, or the received optical signals are lost. 8.11 Setting the Automatic Release Function To protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations, an NE supports the automatic release of the ODU muting, software loopback, and other operations that require you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through the NMS. 8.12 Querying Power Consumption of Boards This section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board. 8.13 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel The impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms. 8.14 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring To monitor and analyze the Ethernet packets at a port, you can enable the port mirroring function so that the received or transmitted packets on the port are duplicated to another Ethernet port to which the Ethernet tester is connected. Then, you can monitor and analyze the packets. This function is supported by the EFP8/EMS6 board of the OptiX RTN 910. 8.15 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port Through the operation, you can learn about the attributes of an Ethernet port, such as rate. 8.16 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports To query the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period, you need to enable the monitoring for the object before that period starts. The FE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation. 8.17 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports This section describes how to query the change curve of the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period. The FE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation. 8.18 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port The FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceeds the specified threshold. Only the FE port on the EFP8 board supports this operation. 8.19 Using the Ethernet Test Frames By using the Ethernet test frames, you can check the connectivity of VCTRUNKs. Only the EFP8 board supports this operation.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.1 Hardware Loopback


Hardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physical connection.

Background Information
Hardware loopback is classified into optical cable loopback, PDH cable loopback, and Ethernet port loopback. l Optical cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit optical fibers are connected through a fiber jumper on the ODF. In certain occasions, an optical attenuator is added based on the actual situation, to prevent the optical board from being damaged by the excessive receive optical power. PDH cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit PDH cables are connected through a short-circuiting cable or connector on the DDF. Ethernet port loopback indicates that the receive and transmit service signals on one Ethernet port are looped back through a special loopback Ethernet cable.

l l

8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters


The optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dust particles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. In this case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that are terminated need to be cleaned in time.

8.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge Cleaners


When there are special cartridge cleaners (such as the CLETOP cassette cleaner), use them for cleaning the fiber connectors.

Prerequisite
l l Disconnect both ends of the fiber. Ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors. Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors are contaminated.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Cartridge cleaner

Procedure
Step 1 Press down and hold the lever. Then, the shutter slides back and exposes a new cleaning area.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-1 Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner

Step 2 Position the fiber tip slightly against the cleaning area and drag the fiber tip slightly in the downward direction. Figure 8-2 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on one cleaning area

Step 3 Repeat the same in the other cleaning area in the same direction as Step 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-3 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on the other cleaning area

Step 4 Release the lever to close the cleaning area. ----End

8.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens Tissue


When there is no cartridge cleaners, use the lens tissue for cleaning fiber connectors.

Prerequisite
l l Disconnect both ends of the fiber. ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors. Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors are contaminated.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l Clean solvent Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas
NOTE

l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent, and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent. Do not use alcohol or formalin. l The fiber cleaning tissue or lint-free wipes can substitute the non-woven lens tissue. l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue. Step 2 Drag the fiber tip slightly on the lens tissue. Figure 8-4 Cleaning the fiber with the lens tissue

Step 3 Repeat Step 2 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been used. Step 4 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber tip. When using compressed gas, note the following points: l First spray it into the air because the initial spray of condensation may contain certain sediment. l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the connector surface. ----End

8.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning Sticks


The fiber adapters need to be cleaned with optical cleaning sticks. This section describes the method of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical interface board. The same method can be used to clean fiber adapters on the optical attenuators and flanges.

Prerequisite
l l Before you clean the fiber adapter, remove the optical fiber and shut down the laser. For details about how to shut down a laser, see 8.9 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser. Inspect the fiber adapter with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber adapter is contaminated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l l l Optical cleaning sticks Clean solvent Special compressed gas
NOTE

l In the case of the SC and FC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 2.5 mm. In the case of the LC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 1.25 mm. l The medical cotton or long fiber cotton can substitute the optical cleaning stick. l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent, and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent. Do not use alcohol or formalin. l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas.

Procedure
Step 1 Apply a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick. Step 2 Touch the adapter gently with the optical cleaning stick and turn the stick clockwise four to five times. Ensure that there is direct contact between the stick tip and fiber tip so that the solvent can clean the adapter tip. Step 3 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber adapter. When using compressed gas, note the following points: l First spray the compressed gas into the air because the initial spray of condensation gas may contain some sediment. l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the inner surface of the connector. ----End

8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events


The U2000 is used to browse alarms, abnormal events, and performance events at the network layer.

8.3.1 Checking the NE Status


You can learn about the basic information such as whether the NE fails to communicate with the NMS and whether any alarms are reported by checking the NE status.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Precautions
NOTE

By default, the color of the NE icon on the NMS indicates the NE status.

Procedure
Step 1 In Main Topology, select the required NE. Step 2 In Main Topology, click Step 3 Click the Attribute tab. Step 4 View the NE status and alarm status.
TIP

You can also determine the NE status based on the comparison between the NE icon and the description at the Legend tab.

----End

8.3.2 Checking the Board Status


You can learn about the board status in a visual manner by checking the slot diagram.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 On the Main Topology, double-click the desired NE. The NE Panel is displayed. The NE is in Running Status. Step 2 Click the icon. The legend description is displayed.

Step 3 Check the running status of the boards based on the legend description. If a board is running normally, the board icon is green. ----End

8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms


You can find the faults that occur on the equipment by browsing current alarms.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu. Step 2 Optional: In the Filter dialog box, click the Basic Settings tab. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In Severity, select the alarm severity to be queried. In Status, select the alarm status to be queried. In Type, select the alarm type. In Last Occurrence Time Segment, specify the alarm generation time. In Clearance Time Segment, specify the alarm clearance time.

Step 3 In the Filter dialog box, click the Alarm Source tab. Step 4 Select the object to be queried. Option Browse all alarms on the NE. Description Select All Objects. 2. Choose Add > Object below NE. 3. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object below NE, and click 4. Click OK. Alarm Source displays Selected Alarm Source. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Browse the displayed alarms. Step 7 Select the newly generated alarms, record the details of the alarms, and click Acknowledge. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 8 Click Yes. Step 9 Notify the troubleshooting personnel to clear the alarms in time. For the details, see A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures. ----End .

Browse certain alarms on the NE. 1. Select Custom.

Related Information
A current alarm refers to an alarm that is not cleared. You can browse the network-wide alarms based on the alarm severity by clicking the alarm indicators in the upper right corner. l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

You can click You can click You can click

(red) to browse the network-wide critical alarms. (orange) to browse the network-wide major alarms. (yellow) to browse the network-wide minor alarms.
138

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

You can click


NOTE

(light-blue) to browse the network-wide warning alarms.

By default, the number shown by each indicator indicates the number of current network-wide alarms, which are not cleared, of the specific severity.

8.3.4 Browsing Abnormal Events


You can find the faults that occur on the equipment in a specific time by browsing abnormal events. An abnormal event refers to an exception that occurs on the system at a particular time rather than an exception that persists for a certain time of period.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Event Logs from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the Filter dialog box, click the Event Source tab. Step 3 Select the object to be queried. Option Description

Browse all performance events on the NE. Select All Objects. Browse certain performance events on the 1. Select Custom. NE. 2. Choose Add > Object below NE. 3. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object below NE, and click 4. Click OK. Event Source displays Selected Event Source. Step 4 Click OK. Step 5 Browse the abnormal events. For details on how to handle an abnormal event, see B.2 Abnormal Performance Events and Handling Procedures. ----End .

Related Information
Being different from an alarm that has both the occurrence time and the clearance time, an abnormal event has only the occurrence time.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events


You can know the running status of the equipment by browsing current SDH/PDH performance events. The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arise between the start time of the monitoring period and the current time.

Prerequisite
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled. For details about how to enable the performance monitoring function, see 8.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs. You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the Main Menu, and then click the Current Performance Data tab. Step 2 Select one or more NEs from the left pane, and click Step 3 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition. Step 4 Select 15-Minute in the Monitor Period field. Step 5 Click the Count tab, and then select Display Continuous Severely Errored Seconds. Step 6 Click Query to browse the current performance events. In normal cases, no bit error performance events should be displayed, and the number of pointer justification events should be less than six per day. Step 7 Click the Gauge tab, select All for the performance event type, and then select Display Current Value and Display Maximum and Minimum Values in the right pane. Step 8 Click Query to browse the displayed performance events. In normal cases, compared with the history records, the gauge indicators, such as the board temperature, do not change drastically. Step 9 Re-define the time span by setting Monitor Period to 24-Hour. Step 10 Repeat Step 5 through Step 8 to query the current performance events in a period of 24 hours. ----End .

8.3.6 Browsing History Alarms


You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing history alarms. A history alarm refers to an alarm that is already cleared.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse History Alarm from the Main Menu. Step 2 Optional: In the Filter dialog box, click the Basic Settings tab. 1. 2. 3. 4. In Severity, select the alarm severity to be queried. In Type, select the alarm type. In Occurrence Time Segment, specify the alarm generation time. In Clearance Time Segment, specify the alarm clearance time. The time span starts from the time when the last history alarm browsing operation was performed to the current time. Step 3 In the Filter dialog box, click the Alarm Source tab. Step 4 Select the object to be queried. Option Browse all alarms on the NE. Description Select All Objects. 2. Choose Add > Object below NE. 3. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object below NE, and click 4. Click OK. Alarm Source displays Selected Alarm Source. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Browse the displayed history alarms. ----End .

Browse certain alarms on the NE. 1. Select Custom.

8.3.7 Browsing History Performance Events


You can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing history performance events.

Prerequisite
l The performance monitoring function must be enabled. For details about how to enable the performance monitoring function, see 8.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs. You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu, and then click the History Performance Data tab. Step 2 Select one or more NEs from the left pane, and click .

Step 3 Set the parameters, such as Monitored Object Filter Condition, Monitor Period, Data Source. Step 4 Click the Gauge tab, and set Performance Event Type. Step 5 Click the Count tab, and set Performance Event Type. Step 6 Click Query. ----End

8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records


You can learn about the threshold-crossing information of the performance events of an NE by browsing the performance event threshold-crossing records.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Browse the performance event threshold-crossing records that are displayed. Step 2 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the Main Menu. Step 3 Click the Performance Threshold-Crossing Record tab. Step 4 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Click .

Step 5 Set the parameters such as Monitored Object Filter Condition, Monitor Period, and Performance Event Type. Step 6 Click Query. ----End

8.3.9 Browsing UAT Events


Learn about the severe abnormalities on the transmission line by browsing UAT events.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Context
UAT refers to a period of 10 consecutive seconds during which the bit error ratio per second of the digital signal in either of the transmission directions of a transmission system is inferior to 10-3. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the unavailable time.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Performance > UAT Event from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Monitored Object Filter Condition, From, To, and Data Source. Step 4 Set Function Block Type and Display Options. Step 5 Click Query. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs


By performing this operation task, you can manually enable or disable performance monitoring for NEs, or set the performance monitoring period.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the performance monitoring parameters of the NEs. 1. 2. 3. Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour. Select Enabled or Disabled in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring. Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring of NEs.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


NOTE

8 Supporting Task

l Generally, both Set 15-Minute Monitoring and Set 24-Hour Monitoring are enabled. l You can specify the start time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area. l You can specify the end time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled and then selecting To in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.

4.

Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.

----End

8.3.11 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of Alarms


This section describes how to set the severity and auto reporting status of specific alarms.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired object. Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Severity and Auto Reporting from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select any items in the column Event and set Severity and Auto Reporting Status for them. Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.12 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects


This section describes how to suppress specific alarms for a specific monitored object.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Monitored Object and click Query. Step 4 Set Status in Alarm Suppression. Step 5 Click Apply. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.13 Suppressing Alarms for NEs


This section describes how to suppress certain alarms for NEs.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE. Step 2 Choose Alarm > NE Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Status in Alarm Suppression. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.14 Reversing Alarms for Service Ports


This section describes how to reverse alarms for service ports.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE. Step 2 Choose Alarm > NE Alarm Attribute from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Reversion Mode to Manual Restoration. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 7 Choose Alarm > Alarm Reversion from the Function Tree. Step 8 Set Reversion Status for the required port. Step 9 Click Apply. Step 10 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.15 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS Insertion


This section describes how to set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion for specific monitored objects.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > AIS Insertion from the Function Tree. Step 2 Set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion. If you select Enabled under an alarm, the AIS signal is inserted when this alarm occurs; otherwise, the AIS signal is not inserted when this alarm occurs. Step 3 Click Apply. Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.3.16 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ Insertion


This section describes how to set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion for service ports.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > UNEQ Insertion Switch from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion. If you select Enabled under an alarm, the UNEQ signal (all 0s) is inserted when this alarm occurs; otherwise, the UNEQ signal is not inserted when this alarm occurs. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.17 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service Ports


This section describes how to set bit error thresholds for service ports.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > Bit Error Alarm Threshold from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set bit error thresholds. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.3.18 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of Performance Events


This section describes how to set monitoring and auto-report status of specific performance events for monitored objects.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set the following parameters: Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report, and 24-Hour AutoReport. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.3.19 Setting Performance Thresholds


This section describes how to set the thresholds of specific performance events for monitored objects.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Threshold from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Threshold Value. Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.3.20 Resetting Performance Registers


This section describes how to reset performance registers. After performance registers are reset, their counts are cleared and they immediately start a new counting period.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Step 2 Choose Performance > Reset Board Performance Register from the Function Tree. Step 3 Set Monitored Object and register types. Step 4 Click Reset. Step 5 In the Hint dialog box that is displayed, click Yes. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.4 Querying a Report


You can obtain the version, manufacture, and microwave link information of all the boards by querying the corresponding report.

8.4.1 Querying the Board Information Report


You can obtain the logic version, and software version of each board by querying the board information report.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Physical Inventory from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select Board from Physical Inventory Type in the Physical Inventory window. Step 3 In Physical Inventory, click the Board List tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 4 Click Filter. In Filter window, set the board or board attributes that need to be queried. Click OK. Step 5 The board information displayed in the Board List. Step 6 Optional: Click Save As. Set the parameters in Saving Options. Step 7 Click OK. Then, you can save and archive the board information as a text file. Step 8 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.4.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report


You can obtain the manufacturing information about each board and the SFP module by querying the board manufacturing information report.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Project Document > Board Manufacturer Information from the Main Menu. Step 2 In Board Manufacturer Information, click the Board Manufacturer Information tab. Step 3 Select one or multiple NEs from the left pane, and click Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 5 Click Query. The Query processing bar is displayed. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 7 Optional: Click Save As. Step 8 Set the parameters in Saving Options. Step 9 Click OK. Then, you can save and archive the board manufacturing information as a text file. ----End .

8.4.3 Querying the Microwave Link Information Report


You can obtain the current and recent transmit/receive power of microwave links by querying the microwave link information report.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 In Main Menu, choose Inventory > Microwave Report > Microwave Link Report. Step 2 In the left pane of the Microwave Link Report tab page, choose one or more NEs, and click . Step 3 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 4 Optional: Click Save As. Step 5 Set the parameters in Saving Options. Step 6 Click OK. Then, you can save and archive the microwave link information as a text file. ----End

8.4.4 Querying the Network-wide License Report


By querying the network-wide license report, you can check the license information of each NE.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Microwave Report > Microwave License Capacity Report from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select one or more NEs in the left pane, and click Step 3 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 4 Optional: Click Save As. Save the license report as a file and archive the file properly. Step 5 Set the parameters in Saving Options. Step 6 Click OK. Then, the license report is saved and archived as a file. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.5 Software Loopback


Software loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS. During software loopback, you need not visit the engineering site. Hence, software loopback is used more widely than hardware loopback.

8.5.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board


The SDH optical interface board supports the optical/electrical interface inloop/outloop and the VC-4 path inloop/outloop.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The optical/electrical interface inloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port are looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the backplane. Figure 8-5 Optical/electrical interface inloop
SDH optical interface board SDH

Backplane

The optical/electrical interface outloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port are looped back at the overhead processing unit towards the remote equipment. Figure 8-6 Optical/electrical interface outloop
Backplane SDH optical interface board SDH

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

The VC-4 path outloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at the logic processing unit towards the remote equipment. Figure 8-7 VC-4 path outloop
Backplane SDH optical interface board VC-4

The VC-4 path inloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at the logic processing unit towards the backplane. Figure 8-8 VC-4 path inloop
Backplane SDH optical board VC-4

Precautions

CAUTION
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by defaults). For details, see 8.11 Setting the Automatic Release Function.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree.
NOTE

The SDH optical interface boards described in this section include the physical SL1D and SL1DA board and the logical SL1D board that the physical CSTA/CSHC board maps.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select By Function, and select the loopback mode from the drop-down list. To Perform... Optical/electrical interface loopback VC-4 path loopback Choose... Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback VC4 Loopback

Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path based on the requirements. Step 5 Click Apply. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.5.2 Setting Loopback for the Tributary Board


The tributary board supports the tributary inloop and outloop.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The tributary inloop is a process wherein the signals over a PDH port are looped back at the coding/decoding unit towards the backplane. Figure 8-9 Tributary inloop

Backplane

PDH interface board PDH

The tributary outloop is a process wherein the signals on a tributary path are looped back at the PDH interface board of the local IDU towards the remote equipment.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-10 Tributary outloop

Backplane PDH interface board PDH

Precautions

CAUTION
The services may be interrupted on the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree.
NOTE

The tributary boards described in this section include the physical SP3S and SP3D boards and the logical SP3S and SP3D boards that the physical CSTA, CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC boards map.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select By Function, and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down list. Step 4 Set the loopback status of the path based on the requirements. Step 5 Click Apply. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.5.3 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing Board


A Smart E1 processing board supports inloops and outloops on E1 ports.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Before setting a loopbacks on the ports of the MP1 board, set PDH ports to Smart E1 ports according to Setting Working Modes of E1 Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Context
The E1 inloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the coding/ decoding unit to the backplane. Figure 8-11 E1 inloop
Smart E1 Processing Board E1

Backplane

The E1 outloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the Smart E1 processing board of the local IDU to the remote equipment. Figure 8-12 E1 outloop
Smart E1 Backplane Processing Boards E1

Precautions

CAUTION
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. l A software loopback may be released automatically within a period (5 minutes, by default). For details, see 8.11 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
NOTE

The MP1 is a logical board derived from mapping of the tributary unit of the CSHD/CSHE board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 Select the operation object from the Object Tree. To Perform... Loopback on the MP1 board Loopback on the other Smart E1 boards Choose... NE Smart E1 processing board

Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 In the Advanced Attributes tab, select the required port. Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port as required. Step 5 Click Apply. The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Close the dialog box. ----End

8.5.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board


The Packet-plane Ethernet interface board supports the Ethernet port inloop (at the MAC layer and PHY layer).

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The Ethernet port MAC inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet physical signals are looped back at the service processing module of the board at the MAC layer towards the backplane. The Ethernet port PHY inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet frame signals are looped back at the interface module of the board at the PHY layer towards the backplane. Figure 8-13 Ethernet port inloop
Backplane Ethernet service processing board

MAC

PHY

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Precautions
NOTE

The tributary boards described in this section include the physical EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6T and EM6F boards and the logical EM4T, EM4F, boards that the physical CSHA, CSHB, CSHC, CSHD and CSHE boards map. PORT 10 on the EFP8 board can not be configured with loops. PORT 8 on the EMS6 board can not be configured with loops.

CAUTION
l A loopback operation results in service interruption. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by defaults). For details, see 8.11 Setting the Automatic Release Function.

CAUTION
When Port Mode of an Ethernet port is set to Layer 3, do not perform any loopback on the port. In this case, LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults.

Procedure
Step 1 Select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree based on the loopback type. To Perform... Choose...

PHY loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. MAC loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port based on the requirements. Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.5.5 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board


EPF8 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer and PHY layer) and the inloop in VC-12 paths. EMS6 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer and PHY layer) and the inloop in VC-3 paths.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Context
A MAC layer inloop is an inloop where the service processing module loops back the Ethernet physical signals towards the backplane through the MAC layer. A PHY layer inloop is an inloop where the interface module loops back the Ethernet frame signals towards the backplane through the PHY layer.
NOTE

PORT 9 in the EFP8 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer. PORT 7 in the EMS6 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer.

Figure 8-14 Ethernet port inloop


Backplane Ethernet service processing board

MAC

PHY

An inloop in a VC-12 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back the signals in a specific VC-12 path towards the backplane. Figure 8-15 VC-12 path inloop
Backplane EOPDH EFP8

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

An inloop in a VC-3 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back the signals in a specific VC-3 path towards the backplane. Figure 8-16 VC-3 path inloop
Backplane EOS EMS6

Precautions

CAUTION
l A loopback operation may interrupt the services on the port where the loopback is performed. l A software loopback may be automatically released within a period (five minutes by default). For details, see 8.11 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
NOTE

A VC-3 loopback can be performed only after the EMS6 is configured with services.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the required board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree according to the loopback type. To Perform... PHY loopback Choose... 1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Select External Port. 3. Click the Basic Attributes tab. MAC loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Select External Port. 3. Click the Basic Attributes tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

To Perform...

Choose... 2. Select By Function. 3. Select the required VC-12 path.

VC-12 path inloop 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

VC-3 path inloop

1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. 2. Select By Board/Port(Channel). 3. Select the required VC-3 path.

Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port as required. Step 4 Click Apply. The confirmation dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. The prompt dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 Close the prompt dialog box. ----End

8.5.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board


Loopbacks on the IF board are classified into IF port loopback, composite port loopback, and Integrated IP radio port MAC loopback. The IF1 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port outloop, composite port inloop, and composite port outloop. The IFU2/IFX2 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port outloop, composite port inloop, composite port outloop, and Integrated IP radio port MAC inloop. The ISU2/ISX2 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port outloop, composite port inloop, and composite port outloop.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The IF port inloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit towards the backplane.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-17 IF port inloop


Backplane IF signal IF board

The IF port outloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit of the board towards the remote equipment. Figure 8-18 IF port outloop

Backplane

IF board IF signal

The composite port inloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped back at the MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the backplane. Figure 8-19 Composite port inloop
Backplane IF board

Microwave baseband signal

The composite outloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped back at the MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the remote equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Figure 8-20 Composite port outloop


Backplane IF board Microwave baseband signal

Precautions

CAUTION
l The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed. l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by defaults). For details, see 8.11 Setting the Automatic Release Function. l To perform the software loopback on the standby IF board of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group, switch the standby IF board to the working state forcedly. Otherwise, the operation may fail. l Before performing the loopback operation for the IFU2/IFX2 board, disable the AM function at both ends of the radio link.

CAUTION
When Port Mode of an Integrated IP radio port is set to Layer 3, do not perform any loopback on the port. In this case, LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE explorer. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select Loopback Attributes. Step 4 Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and set loopback type. Step 5 Click Apply. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Click OK to close the dialog box. Then, a dialog box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.5.7 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback Operations


Loopback is a common method of locating the fault.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Service Trail
Figure 8-21 shows how to locate a fault by performing a loopback operation. Figure 8-21 Service trail
PDH tributary board Cross-connect IF board board ODU ODU SDH IF Cross-connect tributary board board board

NE1

NE2

PDH Cross-connect tributary board board

IF board

ODU

ODU

IF Cross-connect board board

SDH tributary board

NE4

NE3

Optical cable

Precautions
The LSP Traceroute method, instead of sectional loopbacks, is recommended for locating the faults of PWE3 services.

Procedure
Step 1 If the services are available on the radio links, perform the inter-station loopbacks to narrow down the fault to a specific hop.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

1.

Set the outloops for the SDH optical interface boards on NE2 and NE3, and then perform the inter-station loopbacks to locate the fault.

Step 2 After the fault is located on the specific radio link, perform the intra-station loopbacks to narrow down the fault to a specific NE or board. 1. 2. 3. Set inloop for the IF board on the NEs at both ends of the radio link where the fault occurs, to check whether the service receiver or the radio link is faulty. If the fault is located in the service receiver, set outloop for the PDH tributary board to check whether the interface board or switch unit is faulty. If the radio link is faulty, replace the IF board and ODU to check whether the IF board or ODU is faulty.

----End

8.6 Reset
Reset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. Reset is classified into cold reset, warm reset.

8.6.1 Cold Reset


Cold reset is a process wherein the board software is reset and the board is re-initiated. The software of each board runs as a software module in the CPU on the system control, switching, and timing board. During the board initialization, the FPGA, if any, is re-loaded.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions

CAUTION
Cold reset causes service interruption because it is similar to the procedure of removing and inserting a board.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Panel, right-click the board where the cold reset needs to be performed. Step 2 Choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu. Then, the Warning dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click OK.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.6.2 Warm Reset


Warm reset is a process wherein the board software is reset but the board is not re-initiated. The software of each board runs as a software module in the CPU on the integrated board of the system control unit, cross-connect unit, and timing unit.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
During warm reset, the board software is reset but the services are not interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Panel, right-click the board where the warm reset needs to be performed. Step 2 Choose Warm Reset from the shortcut menu. Then, the Warning dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.7 PRBS Test


The pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method of network maintenance and self-check.

8.7.1 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board


If a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the tributary board.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Context
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction and in the cross-connect direction. The PRBS test in the tributary direction can be performed to check the connection between the tributary board and the DDF, as shown in Figure 8-22. Figure 8-22 PRBS test in the tributary direction
DDF frame PDH interface board PRBS Transmitter 1 PRBS Recevicer 1 Loopback at the DDF frame

The PRBS test in the cross-connect direction can be performed to check the connection between the tributary board and the remote NE, as shown in Figure 8-23. Figure 8-23 PRBS test in the cross-connect direction
a) IF board working as the line board PDH interface board PRBS transmitter 1 PRBS receiver 2 IN Cross-connect board IF board OUT IF board

NE at the local end 1 VC-4 inloop or composite port inloop 2 IF port inloop 3 IF port outloop

NE at the opposite end

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


b) Line board working as the SDH optical interface board PDH interface board PRBS transmitter 1 PRBS receiver 2 IN Cross-connect board OUT

8 Supporting Task

SDH optical interface board

NE at the local end 1 VC-4 inloop 2 Port inloop 3 Port outloop

NE at the opposite end

Precautions

CAUTION
l During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted. l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the loopback at the proper location. For details, see Figure 8-22 and Figure 8-23. Step 2 Select the E1 interface board from the Object Tree. Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree. Step 4 Select the port to be tested. Step 5 Set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE

l The PRBS test supports three time units: one second, 10 minutes, and one hour. l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test.

Step 6 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode. Step 7 Click Start to Test. A prompt is displayed. Step 8 Click OK. Step 9 When Process is displayed as 100%, click Query to check the test result.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)


NOTE

8 Supporting Task

The result of a PRBS test can be normal, error, or invalid. l Invalid: indicates that no bit is received. In this case, the curve is yellow. l Normal: indicates that the path is in normal state. In this case, the number of PRBSs is zero, and the curve is green. l Error: indicates that the path has errors. In this case, the number of total PRBSs is a non-zero number, and the curve is red.

----End

8.7.2 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board


If a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded test system on the IF board.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
Figure 8-24 PRBS test of the IF board

IF board PRBS transmitter

ODU

ODU

IF board

1 PRBS transmitter

NE at the local end

NE at the opposite end 1 IF port outloop

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

CAUTION
l During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted. l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time. l The standby IF unit does not support the PRBS test. Before you perform the PRBS test for the standby IF board of a 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group, you must switch the standby IF board to the working state.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform an outloop on the opposite IF board. For details, see 8.5.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board. Step 2 Select the IF board from the Object Tree. Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree. Step 4 Select the port to be tested. Step 5 Set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE

l The time unit of the PRBS test can be one second, 10 minutes, or one hour. l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test.

Step 6 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode. Step 7 Click Start to Test. A prompt is displayed. Step 8 Click OK. Step 9 When Process is displayed as 100%, click Query to check the test result.
NOTE

The result of a PRBS test can be normal, error, or invalid. l Invalid: indicates that no bit is received. In this case, the curve is yellow. l Normal: indicates that the path is in normal state. In this case, the number of PRBSs is zero, and the curve is green. l Error: indicates that the path has errors. In this case, the number of total PRBSs is a non-zero number, and the curve is red.

----End

8.8 Querying the License Capacity


You can check whether the loaded license file meets the requirements by querying the license capacity.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Configuration > License Management. Step 3 Click Query, browse the license capacity of the NE. ----End

8.9 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser


When performing operations such as testing a fiber cut, you can set the on/off state of the laser rather than removing and re-inserting the optical fiber on site.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select By Function. Step 4 Select Laser Switch from the drop-down list. Step 5 Select a port, and then set Laser Switch. Step 6 Click Apply. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Click OK. A prompt is displayed. Step 8 Click OK. ----End

8.10 Setting the ALS Function


The SDH optical interface board supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. This function enables the board to turn off a laser when the board does not transmit services, the optical fiber is faulty, or the received optical signals are lost.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select a port, and then set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. ----End

8.11 Setting the Automatic Release Function


To protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations, an NE supports the automatic release of the ODU muting, software loopback, and other operations that require you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can set whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through the NMS.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Main Menu. Step 2 Select the desired NE from the Object Tree. Click .

Step 3 In Automatic Disabling of NE Function, set Auto Disabling and Auto Disabling Time (min). Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings for the automatic release function. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

8.12 Querying Power Consumption of Boards


This section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power Management from the Main Menu. Step 2 In the NE Power dialog box, select the Board Power tab. Step 3 Select the required NE or board from the object tree, and then click Step 4 Click Query. The Query progress bar is displayed. Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed. Step 6 On the Board Power tab page, browse Nominal Power Consumption and Current Power Consumption of the selected board. ----End .

8.13 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel


The impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select a PDH tributary board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select By Board/Port(Channel). Step 4 Select Port in the list.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 5 Select a port, and check Port Impedance. ----End

8.14 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring


To monitor and analyze the Ethernet packets at a port, you can enable the port mirroring function so that the received or transmitted packets on the port are duplicated to another Ethernet port to which the Ethernet tester is connected. Then, you can monitor and analyze the packets. This function is supported by the EFP8/EMS6 board of the OptiX RTN 910.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the mirroring, monitoring, and analyzing of the Ethernet packets that are received or transmitted on the port. Figure 8-25 Schematic diagram of Ethernet port mirroring
Ethernet processing unit Mirroring port Ethernet equipment Duplication Monitoring port Ethernet tester

To monitor the data in different directions, port mirroring can be performed in the ingress direction and in the egress direction. For the ports on EFP8/EMS6 board: l In the ingress direction Also in the upstream direction. The equipment duplicates the packets received from the mirroring port to the observing port, and then transmits the packets from the observing port to the Ethernet tester. l In the egress direction Also in the downstream direction. The equipment duplicates the packets transmitted by the mirroring port to the observing port, and then transmits the packets from the observing port to the Ethernet tester. In the ingress direction, the ports mirror the data transmitted from the VCTRUNK to the TDM side. In the egress direction, the ports mirror the data transmitted from the TDM side to the VCTRUNK.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the EFP8or EMS6 board. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click New, and set Mirror Listener Port, Uplink Listened Port, and Downlink Listened Port.

Step 4 Click OK. ----End

8.15 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port


Through the operation, you can learn about the attributes of an Ethernet port, such as rate.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Query the attributes of the FE or GE port on the packet plane. 1. 2. 3. 4. In NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Check the parameters such as Port Physical Parameters, Transmitting Rate, and Receiving Rate.

Step 2 Optional: Querying the attributes of the Integrated IP radio port. 1. 2. 3.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

In NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

4.

Check the parameters such as Transmitting Rate and Receiving Rate.

Step 3 Optional: Query the attributes of the external port on the EFP8 board. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Check the parameters such as Transmitting Rate and Receiving Rate.
NOTE

By performing this operation, you can query the attributes of the external ports on the EFP8 board (PORT1 to PORT8) and the attributes of the bridging port on the EFP8 board (PORT9).

----End

8.16 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports


To query the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period, you need to enable the monitoring for the object before that period starts. The FE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port. To enable the flow monitoring function on a port, see 8.16 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
After the flow monitoring function is enabled, the system saves the statistics about the received traffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In normal cases, the system stores the statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. In the system, every measurement entry shows the average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. You can query the statistics in the last 30 days.

Procedure
Step 1 Select a board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Flow Monitoring from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select the Set Monitoring tab. Set Flow Monitoring, Physical Bandwidth Monitoring, Bandwidth Usage Monitoring to Enabled for the Ethernet port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Close the displayed Result dialog box. ----End

8.17 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports


This section describes how to query the change curve of the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period. The FE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port. To enable the flow monitoring function on a port, see 8.16 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
After the flow monitoring function is enabled, the system saves the statistics about the received traffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In normal cases, the system stores the statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. In the system, every measurement entry shows the average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. You can query the statistics in the last 30 days.

Procedure
Step 1 Select a board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Flow Monitoring from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select the Query Flow tab. Step 4 Set the Monitored Object, Monitored Indicator, Start Time, End Time, and Display Mode.

Step 5 Click Query. The system displays the query result in a table or in a graph.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Step 6 Close the displayed Result dialog box. ----End

8.18 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port


The FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceeds the specified threshold. Only the FE port on the EFP8 board supports this operation.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Precautions
NOTE

The receive traffic threshold cannot be set for the Ethernet ports on the packet domain.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Step 3 Select External Port. Step 4 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Step 5 Select an Ethernet port and set Traffic Threshold and Port Traffic Threshold Time Window. Step 6 Click Apply. ----End

8.19 Using the Ethernet Test Frames


By using the Ethernet test frames, you can check the connectivity of VCTRUNKs. Only the EFP8 board supports this operation.

Prerequisite
l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. The service traffic is encapsulated or mapped by using the GFP method.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Background Information
The Ethernet board uses the specific GFP management frame or Ethernet frame as the test frame. One frame is transmitted to the opposite Ethernet board per second. After receiving the test frame, the Ethernet board returns the response frame. Upon receiving the response frame, the Ethernet service processing board at the local end can judge the connectivity of the VCTRUNK in between. Figure 8-26 Ethernet test frames between Ethernet boards
Test frame Local Ethernet board Remote Ethernet board

Response frame

Precautions

CAUTION
Do not use the test frames when the network traffic is heavy.

Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board. Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Test from the Function Tree. Then, the Ethernet Test dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Select the test port and click Clear Counters. Select Clear All Counters . Step 4 Set Send Mode and Frames to Send.
NOTE

It is recommended that you choose "Burst mode", and a maximum of 10 frames can be transmitted each time.

Step 5 Click Apply. The system starts transmitting and receiving test frames. Step 6 After Status displays Finished Sending, click Query. Step 7 Check Counter of Frames Sent and Counter of Received Response of Test Frame.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

8 Supporting Task

Test frames are used to check the network connectivity. If some of the test frames are lost but no alarm is reported on the SDH side, you can infer that the network is normal. If all the test frames are lost, you can infer that the network is faulty. ----End

Related Information
If you choose the continue mode, the local port transmits test frames continuously until the test is disabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Reference

Alarms are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. This chapter describes all the possible alarms on the OptiX RTN 910 and how to handle these alarms. A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order) The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 910 in alphabetical order. A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards) This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)


The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 910 in alphabetical order. Table A-1 Alarm list Alarm Name A_LOC ALM_E1RAI ALM_GFP_dCSF ALM_GFP_dLFD Description Loss of clock in the upstream bus E1 link remote alarm indication Loss of GFP client signals Out of frame state of generic framing procedure (GFP) frames Frame delimitation is out-of-frame at the local end of the IMA link. Differential delay of the IMA link crosses the threshold. The IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the receive direction. The IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the transmit direction. Frame delimitation is out-of-frame at the remote end of the IMA link. Downshift of AM modes Failure indication of MS protection switching Alarm Severity Major Minor Critical Major

ALM_IMA_LIF

Major

ALM_IMA_LODS

Major

ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE

Minor

ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE

Minor

ALM_IMA_RFI

Major

AM_DOWNSHIFT APS_FAIL

Major Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name APS_INDI APS_MANUAL_STOP ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC

Description Indication of the APS protection switching MS protocol stopped manually The number of unknown ATM cells exceeds the specified threshold in a time unit. AU alarm indication Loss of AU pointers Excessive regenerator section errors (B1) Signal degradation due to excessive regenerator section errors (B1) Excessive multiplex section errors (B2) Signal degradation due to excessive multiplex section errors (B2) Excessive higher order path bit errors (B3) Excessive B3 bit errors in a VC-3 path Signal degradation due to excessive higher order path bit errors (B3) Signal degradation due to excessive VC-3 path (B3) bit errors The temperature sensor of battery group 1 fails.

Alarm Severity Major Minor Major

AU_AIS AU_LOP B1_EXC

Major Major Minor

B1_SD

Minor

B2_EXC B2_SD

Major Minor

B3_EXC

Major

B3_EXC_VC3 B3_SD

Major Minor

B3_SD_VC3

Minor

BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL

Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL

Description The temperature sensor of battery group 2 fails. The logical board is not added on the NMS. The board is out-ofposition. The board temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Excessive BIP errors Signal degradation due to excessive BIP errors BOOTROM data check fails. Bus errors The locking function of CES ACR service clock is abnormal. The number of jitter buffer overflows crosses the specified threshold. The number of jitter buffer underflows crosses the specified threshold. The number of lost packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. The number of deformed packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit.

Alarm Severity Major

BD_NOT_INSTALLED

Minor

BD_STATUS BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL

Major Major

BIP_EXC BIP_SD

Minor Minor

BOOTROM_BAD BUS_ERR CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN

Major Critical Minor

CES_JTROVR_EXC

Major

CES_JTRUDR_EXC

Major

CES_LOSPKT_EXC

Major

CES_MALPKT_EXC

Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC

Description The number of lost disordered packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. Remote defect indication The number of errored packets crosses the specified threshold in a time unit. The AC circuit on the opposite NE is faulty. Remote alarm indication The operation on the CF card fails. The CF card is offline. Correctable cell errors The clock source is not in locked mode. Inter-board communication fails. Configuration is not supported. The status of databases is abnormal. Errors in the processing of system databases System databases in protection mode Over-sized DCN network

Alarm Severity Major

CES_RDI CES_STRAYPKT_EXC

Minor Major

CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI CFCARD_FAILED CFCARD_OFFLINE CHCS CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE COMMUN_FAIL CONFIG_NOSUPPORT DBMS_ABNORMAL

Major Major Major Major Minor Minor Major Major Major

DBMS_ERROR

Major

DBMS_PROTECT_MODE DCNSIZE_OVER

Critical Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name DDN_LFA

Description The frame alignment signal of framed E1 services is lost. Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s downstream signals The number of lost packets due to port congestion crosses the threshold. Loss of 2M clock in upstream signals Loss of 2 Mbit/s line signals The ambient humidity sensor of the cabinet fails. The ambient temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. The ambient temperature sensor 1 of the cabinet fails. The ambient temperature sensor 2 of the cabinet fails. Loss of APS frames The working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. Protection switching failure Protection scheme mismatch Loss of connectivity Misconnection

Alarm Severity Major

DOWN_E1_AIS

Minor

DROPRATIO_OVER

Minor

E1_LOC E1_LOS ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL

Major Minor Major

ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL

Major

ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL

Major

ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL

Major

ETH_APS_LOST ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH

Minor Major

ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE

Major Major Critical Critical

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name ETH_CFM_RDI

Description The maintenance association end point (MEP) fails to receive CCM packets. Errored frames Discovery failure Performance events at the opposite end A loopback occurs. Faults occur at the opposite end. Loss of Ethernet port connection No flow on the Ethernet port Discovery failure is detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM. A remote loopback is detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM. Remote Ethernet performance degradation is detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM. Severe faults are detected by point-topoint Ethernet OAM at the remote end. An MAC port loopback is detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM. A VCTRUNK port loopback is detected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM.

Alarm Severity Minor

ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK ETH_EFM_REMFAULT ETH_LOS ETH_NO_FLOW ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL

Minor Major Major Major Critical Critical Major Minor

ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP

Minor

ETHOAM_RMT_SD

Minor

ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT

Minor

ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP

Major

ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP

Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS

Description Loss of periodical connectivity check packets Conflict of maintenance point IDs Loss of external clock sources Loss of external time sources Aged fans Failure of fan boards Frame check sequence (FCS) errors Excessive data traffic received by Ethernet ports Hardware faults Threshold-crossing performance event of the higher order path Loss of multiframes in the higher order path Higher order path remote defect indication Higher order path remote error indication Higher order path signal label mismatch High order path trace identifier mismatch Unequipped higher order path

Alarm Severity Critical

EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT

Major

EXT_SYNC_LOS EXT_TIME_LOC FAN_AGING FAN_FAIL FCS_ERR

Critical Major Minor Major Critical

FLOW_OVER

Minor

HARD_BAD HP_CROSSTR

Critical Minor

HP_LOM

Major

HP_RDI

Minor

HP_REI

Warning

HP_SLM

Minor

HP_TIM HP_UNEQ

Minor Minor

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name HPAD_CROSSTR

Description Adaptation performance threshold-crossing of the higher order path IF cables are disconnected. The power supplied by an IF board to an ODU is abnormal. Preset IF working mode is not supported. The IMA group at the local end fails. The IMA group at the remote end fails. The transmit clock modes at the two ends of the IMA group are different. Abnormal input optical power Over high input optical power Over low input optical power The air inlet temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Trace identifier mismatch K1 and K2 mismatch K2 mismatch Bandwidth inconsistency in the LAG group The LAG is unavailable.

Alarm Severity Minor

IF_CABLE_OPEN IF_INPWR_ABN

Major Major

IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED

Major

IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH

Major Major Minor

IN_PWR_ABN IN_PWR_HIGH IN_PWR_LOW INTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL

Major Critical Critical Major

J0_MM K1_K2_M K2_M LAG_BWMM

Minor Minor Minor Major

LAG_DOWN

Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name LAG_MEMBER_DOWN

Description A member port of a link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable. A member port of a LAG fails. A VCG port of an LAG fails. Ethernet communication failure The laser is shut down. The type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface. The type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface. The laser is shut down. LCAS protocol fails in the receive direction. LCAS protocol fails in the transmit direction. Loss of partial bandwidth in the LCAS receive direction Loss of partial bandwidth in the LCAS transmit direction

Alarm Severity Minor

LAG_PORT_FAIL LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL LAN_LOC

Minor Minor Major

LASER_CLOSED LASER_MOD_ERR

Major Major

LASER_MOD_ERR_EX

Major

LASER_SHUT LCAS_FOPR

Major Major

LCAS_FOPT

Major

LCAS_PLCR

Minor

LCAS_PLCT

Minor

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name LCAS_TLCR

Description Loss of total bandwidth in the LCAS receive direction Loss of total bandwidth in the LCAS transmit direction Loss of cell delimitation The capacity of the configured services exceeds the range permitted by the license file. Out of frame state of E1 frames The license file on the IF board is different from the backup file on the system control board. The NE fails to detect any license file. Faults occur in a data link. Out of frame state of E1 multiframes A loopback occurs. Performance threshold-crossing of the lower order path FIFO overflow on the receive side of the lower order path Lower order path remote defect indication VC-12 path remote defect indication

Alarm Severity Major

LCAS_TLCT

Major

LCD LCS_LIMITED

Major Major

LFA LICENSE_DIFF

Major Warning

LICENSE_LOST LINK_ERR LMFA LOOP_ALM LP_CROSSTR

Major Critical Major Minor Minor

LP_R_FIFO

Minor

LP_RDI

Minor

LP_RDI_VC12

Minor

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name LP_RDI_VC3 LP_REI

Description VC-3 path remote defect indication Lower order path remote error indication VC-12 path remote error indication VC-3 path remote bit error indication Lower order path remote failure indication Lower order path signal label mismatch VC-12 path signal label mismatch VC-3 path signal label mismatch FIFO overflow on the transmit side of the lower order path Lower order path trace identifier mismatch VC-12 path trace identifier mismatch VC-3 path tracking identification mismatch Unequipped lower order paths Unequipped VC-12 paths VC-3 path unequipped The switching mode is single-ended at one end and dual-ended at the other end.

Alarm Severity Minor Minor

LP_REI_VC12 LP_REI_VC3 LP_RFI

Minor Minor Minor

LP_SLM

Minor

LP_SLM_VC12 LP_SLM_VC3 LP_T_FIFO

Minor Minor Minor

LP_TIM

Minor

LP_TIM_VC12 LP_TIM_VC3

Minor Minor

LP_UNEQ LP_UNEQ_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC3 LPS_UNI_BI_M

Minor Minor Minor Minor

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT

Description The LPT closes the access port of the local NE. LPT function failed Link state passthrough function fails at the remote end. Laser not installed Loss of clock synchronization source The number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold. The software detects that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold. Module communication failure Port module type mismatch PW backward defect indication Excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received on the PW. Loss of PW connectivity The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the PW do not match with the specified one.

Alarm Severity Major

LPT_INEFFECT LPT_RFI

Major Critical

LSR_NO_FITED LTI

Critical Major

MAC_EXT_EXC

Major

MAC_FCS_EXC

Major

MOD_COM_FAIL

Major

MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH MPLS_PW_BDI MPLS_PW_Excess

Critical Minor Minor

MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_MISMATCH

Critical Critical

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name MPLS_PW_MISMERGE

Description The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged on the PW. Signal degradation on the PW Signal failure on the PW Unknown defects on the PW Tunnel backward defect indication Excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received on the tunnel. Tunnel forward defect indication Loss of tunnel connectivity The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the tunnel do not match with the specified one. The trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged on the tunnel. The OAM protocol negotiation between the two ends of the tunnel fails. Signal degradation on the tunnel Signal failure on the tunnel

Alarm Severity Major

MPLS_PW_SD MPLS_PW_SF MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess

Major Major Major Minor Minor

MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH

Major Critical Critical

MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE

Major

MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL

Minor

MPLS_TUNNEL_SD MPLS_TUNNEL_SF

Major Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN MS_AIS MS_CROSSTR

Description Unknown defects on the tunnel Multiplex section alarm indication Multiplex section performance threshold-crossing Multiplex section remote defect indication Multiplex section remote error indication Multiplex section adaptation performance threshold-crossing The ring network has multiple RPL_OWNER nodes. The IF port is in the AM testing state. Excessive errors on radio links Signal degradation due to excessive errors on radio links Configuration mismatch on radio links Continuous wave Loss of E1 signals Microwave frames have the errors that cannot be corrected by using the forward error correction (FEC) technology. Label mismatch on radio links

Alarm Severity Major Major Minor

MS_RDI

Minor

MS_REI

Warning

MSAD_CROSSTR

Minor

MULTI_RPL_OWNER

Minor

MW_AM_TEST MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD

Minor Minor Minor

MW_CFG_MISMATCH

Critical

MW_CONT_WAVE MW_E1_LOST MW_FEC_UNCOR

Minor Major Minor

MW_LIM

Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name MW_LOF MW_RDI

Description Loss of microwave frames Remote defect indication on radio links The NE software is lost. The software in the main area is different from that in the standby area. The NE is in the installation state. The board software is lost. The N+1 protection protocol is stopped manually. The N+1 protection switching fails. N+1 protection switching indication Synchronization with the NTP time fails. Out of cell delimitation Abnormal current of the storage battery The storage battery fails to supply power for the equipment. The door of an outdoor cabinet is open. Fan failure The relative humidity in the cabinet environment crosses the specified threshold.

Alarm Severity Critical Minor

NESF_LOST NESOFT_MM

Critical Major

NESTATE_INSTALL NO_BD_SOFT NP1_MANUAL_STOP

Critical Critical Minor

NP1_SW_FAIL NP1_SW_INDI NTP_SYNC_FAIL OCD ODC_BATTERY_CURRENT_ABN ODC_BATTERY_PWRDOWN

Major Major Minor Major Major Major

ODC_DOOR_OPEN

Critical

ODC_FAN_FAILED ODC_HUMI_ABN

Major Minor

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name ODC_LOAD_PWRDOWN ODC_MDL_ABN ODC_POWER_FAIL

Description The secondary load is powered off. The power module is abnormal. Exceptions occur in the AC input power voltage. Smoke occurs in an outdoor cabinet. The surge protection function of the outdoor cabinet fails. The TEC air conditioning module in the cabinet fails. The ambient temperature of the cabinet or the temperature of the storage battery is inappropriate. Water in the outdoor cabinet Abnormal output optical power The air outlet temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. The external recycling outlet temperature sensor of the cabinet fails. Activating patch packages times out. Deactivating patch packages times out. Abnormal patch package Links of the 1+1 protection group fail.

Alarm Severity Major Major Major

ODC_SMOKE_OVER ODC_SURGE_PROTECTION_FAIL

Critical Critical

ODC_TEC_ALM

Major

ODC_TEMP_ABN

Minor

ODC_WATER_ALM OUT_PWR_ABN OUT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL

Critical Critical Major

OUT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL

Major

PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT PATCH_PKGERR PG_LINK_FAIL

Minor Minor Minor Critical

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name PG_PRT_DEGRADED

Description The working link or protection link of the 1+1 protection group is faulty. Inconsistent PLA configurations The traffic is higher than the port bandwidth threshold. Port not in position The working mode of the remote FE port does not match that of the local FE port. Power input alarm Power module alarm The number of lost packets in a PW crosses the threshold. Loss of APS frames The working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. Protection switching failure Protection scheme mismatch Reset of the receive FIFO Loss of clock on the receive line side Loss of frame on the receive line side Loss of signal or loss of microwave frame on the receive line side

Alarm Severity Major

PLA_CFG_MISMATCH PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC

Critical Warning

PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE PORTMODE_MISMATCH

Major Minor

POWER_ABNORMAL POWER_ALM PW_DROPPKT_EXC

Major Major Warning

PWAPS_LOST PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH

Minor Major

PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH R_F_RST R_LOC R_LOF R_LOS

Major Major Minor Critical Critical Critical

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name R_S_ERR RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF RADIO_MUTE RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH RADIO_RSL_HIGH RADIO_RSL_LOW RADIO_TSL_HIGH RADIO_TSL_LOW RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR RELAY_ALARM_MINOR RMFA

Description Errors in the received signal Radio fading margin is insufficient. The radio transmitter is muted. Antennas are not aligned. Over high radio receive signal level Over low radio receive signal level Over high radio transmit signal level Over low radio transmit signal level There are critical alarm inputs. There are warning inputs. There are major alarm inputs. There are minor alarm inputs. Loss of multiframe alignment at the remote end Radio protection switching indication Regenerator section performance threshold-crossing The real-time clock (RTC) of the system control board fails. Clock source switching in S1 mode RADIUS authentication fails.

Alarm Severity Critical Minor Warning Minor Critical Critical Critical Critical Critical Warning Major Minor Minor

RPS_INDI RS_CROSSTR

Major Minor

RTC_FAIL

Major

S1_SYN_CHANGE SEC_RADIUS_FAIL

Major Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name SECU_ALM SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT

Description Security alarm Ethernet services are interrupted. The commit operation is not performed during software package loading. The automatic match function is disabled. The board software version and the version of the running software are inconsistent. The submit operation fails. The package diffusion is being performed on the NE. Certain files in the package stored in flash memory are lost. The software package does not contain any board software. Software package version consistency check fails. The version rollback on an NE fails. Synchronous source degradation Loss of synchronization clock sources Loss of analog signals at 2 Mbit/s interfaces

Alarm Severity Major Warning Critical

SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH

Minor Critical

SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL SWDL_INPROCESS

Minor Warning

SWDL_NEPKGCHECK

Critical

SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT

Minor

SWDL_PKGVER_MM

Minor

SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL SYN_BAD SYNC_C_LOS

Minor Minor Warning

T_ALOS

Major

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name T_F_RST T_LOC TEMP_ALARM THUNDERALM TR_LOC TU_AIS TU_AIS_VC12 TU_AIS_VC3 TU_LOP TU_LOP_VC12 TU_LOP_VC3 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED UP_E1_AIS

Description Reset of the transmit FIFO Loss of clock on the transmit line side Excessive board temperature Surge protection fails. Clock failure TU alarm indication VC-12 path TU alarm indication TU of VC-3 level alarm indication Loss of TU pointers Loss of TU pointers in VC-12 paths TU of VC-3 level loss of pointer The tunnel protection group degrades. Alarm indication of 2 Mbit/s upstream signals Uncorrectable cell errors Alarm indication signal of the VC connection Loss of VC connectivity check Remote defect indication of the VC connection Excessive virtual concatenation delay

Alarm Severity Minor Major Minor Minor Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Major Minor

UHCS VC_AIS

Minor Critical

VC_LOC VC_RDI

Major Major

VCAT_LOA

Critical

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Name VCAT_LOM_VC12

Description Loss of multiframe of VC-12 path virtual concatenation The virtually concatenated multiframes in a VC-3 path are lost. SQ mismatch of VC-12 path virtual concatenation SQ mismatch of VC-3 path virtual concatenation Loss of voltage Alarm indication signal of the VP connection Loss of VP connectivity check Remote defect indication of the VP connection Failure in reading and writing chip registers Errored board types Loss of XPIC compensation signals

Alarm Severity Major

VCAT_LOM_VC3

Major

VCAT_SQM_VC12

Major

VCAT_SQM_VC3

Major

VOLT_LOS VP_AIS

Major Critical

VP_LOC VP_RDI

Major Major

W_R_FAIL WRG_BD_TYPE XPIC_LOS

Major Major Critical

A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)


This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board.
NOTE

The NE software consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board. The NMS also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board. For OptiX RTN 910, all physical boards, except the system control, switching, and timing board, correspond to logical boards of the same names. Table A-2 shows the logical boards corresponding to the system control, switching, and timing board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Table A-2 Logical boards corresponding to the system control, switching, and timing board Physical Board CSTA CSHA CSHB CSHC CSHD CSHE Logical Board CSTA in slot 1 + SL1D in slot 8 + SP3S in slot 9 + AUX in slot 10 CSHA in slot 1 + EM4T in slot 7 + SP3S in slot 9 + AUX in slot 10 CSHB in slot 1 + EM4T in slot 7 + SP3D in slot 9 + AUX in slot 10 CSHC in slot 1 + EM4F in slot 7 + SL1D in slot 8 + SP3S in slot 9 + AUX in slot 10 CSHD in slot 1 + EM6X in slot 7 + MP1 in slot 9 + AUX in slot 10 CSHE in slot 1 + EM6TB in slot 7 + MP1 in slot 9 + AUX in slot 10

A.2.1 CSTA
APS_FAIL BD_STATUS CLK_NO_TRACE_ MODE DCNSIZE_OVER K2_M LPS_UNI_BI_M NESTATE_INSTA LL NTP_SYNC_FAIL PG_LINK_FAIL RPS_INDI SECU_ALM APS_INDI BOOTROM_BAD DBMS_ABNORM AL EXT_SYNC_LOS LAN_LOC LTI NP1_MANUAL_ST OP PATCH_ACT_TIM EOUT PG_PRT_DEGRAD ED RTC_FAIL SWDL_ACTIVATE D_TIMEOUT APS_MANUAL_ST OP CFCARD_FAILED DBMS_ERROR HARD_BAD LCS_LIMITED NESF_LOST NP1_SW_FAIL PATCH_DEACT_T IMEOUT PLA_CFG_MISMA TCH S1_SYN_CHANGE SWDL_AUTOMAT CH_INH BD_NOT_INSTAL LED CFCARD_OFFLIN E DBMS_PROTECT_ MODE K1_K2_M LICENSE_LOST NESOFT_MM NP1_SW_INDI PATCH_PKGERR POWER_ALM SEC_RADIUS_FAI L SWDL_CHGMNG_ NOMATCH

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

SWDL_COMMIT_ FAIL SWDL_PKGVER_ MM TEMP_ALARM

SWDL_INPROCES S SWDL_ROLLBAC K_FAIL WRG_BD_TYPE

SWDL_NEPKGCH ECK SYN_BAD -

SWDL_PKG_NOB DSOFT SYNC_C_LOS -

A.2.2 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD/CSHE
APS_FAIL BD_STATUS CLK_NO_TRACE_ MODE DCNSIZE_OVER ETH_APS_TYPE_ MISMATCH HARD_BAD LAN_LOC LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_SF MPLS_TUNNEL_F DI MPLS_TUNNEL_O AMFAIL NESF_LOST NP1_SW_FAIL PATCH_DEACT_T IMEOUT PLA_CFG_MISMA TCH
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

APS_INDI BOOTROM_BAD DBMS_ABNORM AL ETH_APS_LOST EXT_SYNC_LOS K1_K2_M LCS_LIMITED LTI MPLS_PW_MISM ATCH MPLS_PW_UNKN OWN MPLS_TUNNEL_L OCV MPLS_TUNNEL_S D NESOFT_MM NP1_SW_INDI PATCH_PKGERR POWER_ALM

APS_MANUAL_ST OP CFCARD_FAILED DBMS_ERROR ETH_APS_PATH_ MISMATCH EXT_TIME_LOC K2_M LICENSE_LOST MPLS_PW_BDI MPLS_PW_MISME RGE MPLS_TUNNEL_B DI MPLS_TUNNEL_ MISMATCH MPLS_TUNNEL_S F NESTATE_INSTA LL NTP_SYNC_FAIL PG_LINK_FAIL PW_DROPPKT_EX C

BD_NOT_INSTAL LED CFCARD_OFFLIN E DBMS_PROTECT_ MODE ETH_APS_SWITC H_FAIL FLOW_OVER LAG_BWMM LPS_UNI_BI_M MPLS_PW_Excess MPLS_PW_SD MPLS_TUNNEL_E xcess MPLS_TUNNEL_ MISMERGE MPLS_TUNNEL_U NKNOWN NP1_MANUAL_ST OP PATCH_ACT_TIM EOUT PG_PRT_DEGRAD ED PWAPS_LOST

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

PWAPS_PATH_MI SMATCH RTC_FAIL SRV_SHUTDOWN _LD SWDL_COMMIT_ FAIL SWDL_PKGVER_ MM TEMP_ALARM

PWAPS_SWITCH_ FAIL S1_SYN_CHANGE SWDL_ACTIVATE D_TIMEOUT SWDL_INPROCES S SWDL_ROLLBAC K_FAIL TUNNEL_APS_DE GRADED

PWAPS_TYPE_MI SMATCH SEC_RADIUS_FAI L SWDL_AUTOMAT CH_INH SWDL_NEPKGCH ECK SYN_BAD WRG_BD_TYPE

RPS_INDI SECU_ALM SWDL_CHGMNG_ NOMATCH SWDL_PKG_NOB DSOFT SYNC_C_LOS MOD_COM_FAIL (Only reported by CSHD\CSHE)

A.2.3 IF1
AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LICENSE_DIFF MS_CROSSTR MW_CONT_WAV E MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR WRG_BD_TYPE AU_LOP B2_SD HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LICENSE_LOST MS_RDI MW_FEC_UNCOR R_LOC T_LOC B1_EXC B3_EXC HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM IF_MODE_UNSUP PORTED LOOP_ALM MS_REI MW_LIM R_LOF TEMP_ALARM B1_SD B3_SD HP_LOM HP_TIM LCS_LIMITED MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_LOF R_LOS VOLT_LOS -

A.2.4 IFU2
AM_DOWNSHIFT BUS_ERR BD_STATUS DROPRATIO_OVE R BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TU_LOP

ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_BWMM LICENSE_DIFF LP_REI MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF VOLT_LOS

ETH_EFM_DF FLOW_OVER LAG_DOWN LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE

ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC TU_AIS

A.2.5 IFX2
AM_DOWNSHIFT BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM BD_STATUS DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_BWMM LICENSE_DIFF LP_REI MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF FLOW_OVER LAG_DOWN LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

R_LOC TU_LOP

R_LOF VOLT_LOS

TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE

TU_AIS XPIC_LOS

A.2.6 SL1D/SL1DA
AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LASER_CLOSED MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR RS_CROSSTR AU_LOP B2_SD HARD_BAD HP_REI IN_PWR_HIGH LASER_MOD_ER R_EX MS_CROSSTR R_LOC T_LOC B1_EXC B3_EXC HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM IN_PWR_LOW LOOP_ALM MS_RDI R_LOF WRG_BD_TYPE B1_SD B3_SD HP_LOM HP_TIM J0_MM LSR_NO_FITED MS_REI R_LOS -

A.2.7 EM6T
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW LAG_DOWN MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_MEMBER_D OWN MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LOOP_ALM MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.2.8 EM6TA
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW LAG_DOWN MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_MEMBER_D OWN MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LOOP_ALM MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.9 EM6TB
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS LAG_DOWN MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW LAG_MEMBER_D OWN MAC_FCS_EXC WRG_BD_TYPE COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LOOP_ALM MULTI_RPL_OWN ER DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC -

A.2.10 EM6F
BD_STATUS BUS_ERR COMMUN_FAIL DROPRATIO_OVE R
208

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC

ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH

ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM

ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.11 EM6FA
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC TEMP_ALARM DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER WRG_BD_TYPE

A.2.12 EM4T
BD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_LOC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW LAG_DOWN MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH

ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_MEMBER_D OWN MAC_FCS_EXC WRG_BD_TYPE

ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LOOP_ALM MULTI_RPL_OWN ER -

ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC -

A.2.13 EM4F
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC WRG_BD_TYPE DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS HARD_BAD LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC -

A.2.14 EFP8
ALM_GFP_dCSF BIP_SD ALM_GFP_dLFD COMMUN_FAIL BD_STATUS DOWN_E1_AIS BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETHOAM_DISCO VER_FAIL ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP FCS_ERR LAG_VC_PORT_F AIL LCAS_PLCT LMFA LP_SLM_VC12 NO_BD_SOFT TU_LOP_VC12 W_R_FAIL

ETH_CFM_RDI ETHOAM_RMT_C RIT_FAULT ETHOAM_VCG_S ELF_LOOP FLOW_OVER LCAS_FOPR LCAS_TLCR LOOP_ALM LP_TIM_VC12 RMFA VCAT_LOA WRG_BD_TYPE

ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_RMT_L OOP EX_ETHOAM_CC _LOS HARD_BAD LCAS_FOPT LCAS_TLCT LP_RDI_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC12 TEMP_ALARM VCAT_LOM_VC12 -

ETH_LOS ETHOAM_RMT_S D EX_ETHOAM_MPI D_CNFLCT LAG_PORT_FAIL LCAS_PLCR LFA LP_REI_VC12 LPT_RFI TU_AIS_VC12 VCAT_SQM_VC12 -

A.2.15 EMS6
ALM_GFP_dCSF BD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_RMT_L OOP EX_ETHOAM_MPI D_CNFLCT IN_PWR_ABN LCAS_FOPT LCAS_TLCT LP_RDI_VC3 LP_SLM_VC3 ALM_GFP_dLFD BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_LOS ETHOAM_RMT_S D FCS_ERR LAG_PORT_FAIL LCAS_PLCR LINK_ERR LP_REI_VC12 LP_TIM_VC12 B3_EXC_VC3 BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETHOAM_DISCO VER_FAIL ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP FLOW_OVER LAG_VC_PORT_F AIL LCAS_PLCT LOOP_ALM LP_REI_VC3 LP_TIM_VC3 B3_SD_VC3 BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_RDI ETHOAM_RMT_C RIT_FAULT EX_ETHOAM_CC _LOS HARD_BAD LCAS_FOPR LCAS_TLCR LP_RDI_VC12 LP_SLM_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC12

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

LP_UNEQ_VC3 MULTI_RPL_OWN ER TEMP_ALARM TU_LOP_VC3 VCAT_SQM_VC12

LPT_INEFFECT NO_BD_SOFT TU_AIS_VC12 VCAT_LOA VCAT_SQM_VC3

LPT_RFI OUT_PWR_ABN TU_AIS_VC3 VCAT_LOM_VC12 WRG_BD_TYPE

MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH PORT_MODULE_ OFFLINE TU_LOP_VC12 VCAT_LOM_VC3 -

A.2.16 SP3S/SP3D
A_LOC DOWN_E1_AIS HPAD_CROSSTR LP_RDI LP_T_FIFO R_S_ERR TU_AIS BD_STATUS E1_LOC LOOP_ALM LP_REI LP_TIM WRG_BD_TYPE TU_LOP BIP_EXC E1_LOS LP_CROSSTR LP_RFI LP_UNEQ T_ALOS UP_E1_AIS BIP_SD HARD_BAD LP_R_FIFO LP_SLM R_F_RST T_F_RST DDN_LFA

A.2.17 AUX
BD_STATUS RELAY_ALARM_ MAJOR HARD_BAD RELAY_ALARM_ MINOR RELAY_ALARM_ CRITICAL WRG_BD_TYPE RELAY_ALARM_I GNORE -

A.2.18 PIU
BD_STATUS WRG_BD_TYPE HARD_BAD POWER_ABNORM AL THUNDERALM -

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.2.19 FAN
BD_STATUS WRG_BD_TYPE FAN_AGING FAN_FAIL POWER_ALM -

A.2.20 ISU2
AM_DOWNSHIFT B1_SD B3_SD BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM LAG_BWMM LICENSE_DIFF LP_REI MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC T_LOC VOLT_LOS AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP HP_LOM HP_TIM LAG_DOWN LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MS_CROSSTR MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE AU_LOP B2_SD BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF FLOW_OVER HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MS_RDI MW_AM_TEST MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF TU_AIS B1_EXC B3_EXC BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MS_REI MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR TU_LOP -

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.2.21 ISX2
AM_DOWNSHIFT B1_SD B3_SD BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT HP_CROSSTR HP_SLM LAG_BWMM LICENSE_DIFF LP_REI MS_AIS MSAD_CROSSTR MW_BER_SD MW_FEC_UNCOR PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC T_LOC VOLT_LOS AU_AIS B2_EXC BD_STATUS DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP HP_LOM HP_TIM LAG_DOWN LICENSE_LOST LP_UNEQ MS_CROSSTR MULTI_RPL_OWN ER MW_CFG_MISMA TCH MW_LIM R_LOC TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE AU_LOP B2_SD BIP_EXC ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF FLOW_OVER HP_RDI HP_UNEQ LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LOOP_ALM MAC_EXT_EXC MS_RDI MW_AM_TEST MW_CONT_WAV E MW_LOF R_LOF TU_AIS XPIC_LOS B1_EXC B3_EXC BIP_SD ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK HARD_BAD HP_REI IF_CABLE_OPEN LCS_LIMITED LP_RDI MAC_FCS_EXC MS_REI MW_BER_EXC MW_E1_LOST MW_RDI RS_CROSSTR TU_LOP -

A.2.22 ML1/MD1
ALM_E1RAI ALM_IMA_RE_TX _UNUSABLE CES_ACR_LOCK_ ABN
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

ALM_IMA_LIF ALM_IMA_RFI CES_JTROVR_EX C

ALM_IMA_LODS ATMPW_UNKNO WNCELL_EXC CES_JTRUDR_EX C

ALM_IMA_RE_RX _UNUSABLE BD_STATUS CES_LOSPKT_EX C


214

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

CES_MALPKT_EX C CESPW_OPPOSIT E_ACFAULT HARD_BAD LCD OCD TR_LOC VC_LOC VP_RDI

CES_MISORDERP KT_EXC CESPW_OPPOSIT E_RAI IMA_GROUP_LE_ DOWN LFA POWER_ABNORM AL UHCS VC_RDI BUS_ERR

CES_RDI CHCS IMA_GROUP_RE_ DOWN LMFA T_ALOS UP_E1_AIS VP_AIS -

CES_STRAYPKT_ EXC WRG_BD_TYPE IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH LOOP_ALM TEMP_ALARM VC_AIS VP_LOC -

A.2.23 MP1
A_LOC ALM_IMA_RE_RX _UNUSABLE BD_STATUS CES_JTROVR_EX C CES_MISORDERP KT_EXC CESPW_OPPOSIT E_RAI E1_LOS IMA_GROUP_RE_ DOWN LMFA LP_RDI LP_T_FIFO POWER_ABNORM AL T_F_RST ALM_E1RAI ALM_IMA_RE_TX _UNUSABLE BIP_EXC CES_JTRUDR_EX C CES_RDI CHCS HARD_BAD IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH LOOP_ALM LP_REI LP_TIM R_F_RST TR_LOC ALM_IMA_LIF ALM_IMA_RFI BIP_SD CES_LOSPKT_EX C CES_STRAYPKT_ EXC DOWN_E1_AIS HPAD_CROSSTR LCD LP_CROSSTR LP_RFI LP_UNEQ R_S_ERR TU_AIS ALM_IMA_LODS ATMPW_UNKNO WNCELL_EXC CES_ACR_LOCK_ ABN CES_MALPKT_EX C CESPW_OPPOSIT E_ACFAULT E1_LOC IMA_GROUP_LE_ DOWN LFA LP_R_FIFO LP_SLM OCD T_ALOS TU_LOP

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

UHCS VC_RDI WRG_BD_TYPE

UP_E1_AIS VP_AIS -

VC_AIS VP_LOC -

VC_LOC VP_RDI -

A.2.24 EM6X
BD_STATUS ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_EFM_DF ETH_LOS IN_PWR_ABN LASER_SHUT MAC_EXT_EXC PORTMODE_MISMATCH BUS_ERR ETH_CFM_MISME RGE ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_NO_FLOW LAG_DOWN LOOP_ALM MAC_FCS_EXC WRG_BD_TYPE COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_EFM_LOOPB ACK ETHOAM_SELF_L OOP LAG_MEMBER_D OWN LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT MULTI_RPL_OWN ER DROPRATIO_OVE R ETH_CFM_UNEXP ERI ETH_EFM_REMF AULT FLOW_OVER LASER_MOD_ER R LSR_NO_FITED PORT_EXC_TRAF FIC -

A.2.25 ODU
BD_STATUS LOOP_ALM RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH RADIO_TSL_LOW CONFIG_NOSUPP ORT POWER_ALM RADIO_RSL_HIG H TEMP_ALARM HARD_BAD RADIO_FADING_ MARGIN_INSUFF RADIO_RSL_LOW WRG_BD_TYPE IF_INPWR_ABN RADIO_MUTE RADIO_TSL_HIG H -

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.2.26 PMU
BAT1TEMP_SENS OR_FAIL ENVTEMP1_SENS OR_FAIL ODC_BATTERY_P WRDOWN ODC_MDL_ABN ODC_TEMP_ABN BAT2TEMP_SENS OR_FAIL ENVTEMP2_SENS OR_FAIL ODC_DOOR_OPE N ODC_POWER_FAI L ODC_WATER_AL M BD_STATUS HARD_BAD ODC_HUMI_ABN ODC_SMOKE_OV ER WRG_BD_TYPE ENVHUM_SENSO R_FAIL ODC_BATTERY_C URRENT_ABN ODC_LOAD_PWR DOWN ODC_SURGE_PRO TECTION_FAIL -

A.2.27 TCU
BD_STATUS INTEMP_SENSOR _FAIL ODC_SURGE_PRO TECTION_FAIL OUT1TEMP_SENS OR_FAIL BDTEMP_SENSOR _FAIL ODC_DOOR_OPE N ODC_TEC_ALM OUT2TEMP_SENS OR_FAIL ENVTEMP_SENSO R_FAIL ODC_FAN_FAILE D ODC_TEMP_ABN WRG_BD_TYPE HARD_BAD ODC_SMOKE_OV ER ODC_WATER_AL M -

A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures


This chapter describes all the alarms on the OptiX RTN 910 in alphabetical order and how to handle these alarms.

A.3.1 A_LOC
Description
The A_LOC is an alarm indicating that a clock signal is lost in the uplink bus.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the A_LOC alarm occurs, the services carried by the board are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.2 ALM_E1RAI
Description
The ALM_E1RAI is an alarm indicating that the E1 link on the opposite NE reports alarms. This alarm is reported on the local NE when the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, DOWN_E1_AIS, LFA, or LMFA alarm is reported on the opposite NE.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services on the local NE in the downstream direction are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS, LFA, LMFA, UP_E1_AIS, or DOWN_E1_AIS alarm.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS, LFA, LMFA, UP_E1_AIS, or DOWN_E1_AIS alarm. Step 2 Handle these alarms first. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.3 ALM_GFP_dCSF
Description
The ALM_GFP_dCSF is an alarm indicating that the generic framing procedure (GFP) customer signal is lost. When the source end fails to receive the GFP customer signal, it sends the management frame to the sink end. The ALM_GFP_dCSF alarm is reported when the sink end receives the management frame.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs. Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades. Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs. 1. 1. 1. Reconfigure the timeslot binding at the source and sink VCTRUNKs. Troubleshoot the radio link. Replace the faulty board. Step 2 Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades. Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.4 ALM_GFP_dLFD
Description
The ALM_GFP_dLFD is an alarm indicating that the GFP frame is out of frame. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the GFP frame is out of frame.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the logical port, and the value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled, the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured with different timeslots or different numbers of paths.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty. 1. Check whether the links where the service travels have errors or become faulty. If... The links are faulty The links are normal Then... Rectify the fault. Replace the alarmed board.

Step 2 Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled, the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured with different timeslots or different numbers of paths. 1. Correct the configuration data. For details, see Configuring VCTRUNKs on an Ethernet Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.5 ALM_IMA_LIF
Description
The ALM_IMA_LIF is an alarm indicating that the IMA link is out of frame in the receive direction. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMA link in the receive direction.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.


221

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on the IMA port, causing loss of cells. After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. If... The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm Then... Handle the relevant alarms first. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. 1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
Loss of frame alignment A frame alignment word, provided at the physical layer, occupies the initial position of a frame and defines the start of information field. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when the position of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.6 ALM_IMA_LODS
Description
The ALM_IMA_LODS is an alarm indicating the differential delay on the IMA link crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the maximum differential delay on the IMA link exceeds the preset value.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.

Impact on the System


The IMA links are unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly. Cause 2: Within one IMA group, the transmission distances of member links have too large gaps.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly. 1. Change the maximum differential delay to a greater value. For details, see Modifying CES Service Parameters.

Step 2 Cause 2: Within one IMA group, the transmission distances of member links have too large gaps. 1. Use the meter to measure the transmission time on E1 links. If the transmission time on different links has a gap larger than 25 ms (default value), adjust the IMA links or delete the member link with over long transmission time from the IMA group.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
Differential delay Differential delay refers to the service delay difference between E1 links.

A.3.7 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE
Description
The ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the receive direction.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on the IMA port, causing loss of cells. After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm

Then... Handle the relevant alarms first. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. 1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.8 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE
Description
The ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE fails in the transmit direction.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on the IMA port, causing loss of cells. After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. If... The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm Then... Handle the relevant alarms first. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. 1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board. ----End Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Related Information
None.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.9 ALM_IMA_RFI
Description
The ALM_IMA_RFI is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE is out of frame (OOF) in the receive direction. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMA link of the opposite NE and the opposite NE notifies the local NE of its OOF state.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.

Impact on the System


l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured for the IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs on the IMA port, causing loss of cells. After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS, R_LOF, and MS_AIS. If... The path reports any SDH alarm The path does not report any SDH alarm
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Then... Handle the relevant alarms first. Go to Cause 2.


227

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is consistent. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty. 1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
Frame alignment loss A frame alignment word, provided at the physical layer, occupies the initial position of a frame and defines the start of information field. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when the position of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream.

A.3.10 AM_DOWNSHIFT
Description
The AM_DOWNSHIFT is an alarm indicating the downshift of the AM scheme. This alarm occurs when the AM scheme is downshifted from the highest-efficiency scheme to the lowerefficiency scheme. When the AM scheme is upshifted from the lower-efficiency scheme to the highest-efficiency scheme, this alarm is cleared.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the AM_DOWNSHIFT alarm occurs, the transmission capacity is reduced.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the working channels. Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels. Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power. Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the working channels. 1. When the external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the working channels, the downshift of the AM scheme is normal. Hence, no measures should be taken to handle the alarm. Eliminate the interferences around the working channels. Use the NMS to check whether the transmit power of the ODU at the transmit end is normal. For details on troubleshooting at the transmit end, see Troubleshooting Microwave Links. Use the NMS to check whether the receive power of the ODU at the receive end is normal. For details on troubleshooting at the receive end, see Troubleshooting Microwave Links.

Step 2 Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels. 1. 1. Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power.

Step 4 Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.11 APS_FAIL
Description
The APS_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. l 0x01: linear MS protection Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


When the APS_FAIL alarm occurs, the services cannot be switched. If the current paths are unavailable, the services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly. Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly. 1. Check whether the parameters of the MSP protocol are set correctly. If... The parameters are set incorrectly The parameters are set correctly Step 2 Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost. 1. 2. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network. For details, see Enabling/ Disabling the linear MSP protocol. If... Then... Then... Set the parameters correctly. Go to the next step.

The alarm is cleared after the protocol is End the alarm handling. restarted The alarm persists after the protocol is restarted ----End Contact Huawei engineers to handle the alarm.

Related Information
None.

A.3.12 APS_INDI
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The APS_INDI is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching occurs.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. l 0x01: linear MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


During the switching ( 50 ms), the service is interrupted. After the switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. In the case of 1:N MS protection, after the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs. 1. 2. Query the linear MSP group. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the manual switching state, forced switching state, or locked switching state. If yes, release the switching and check whether the alarm is cleared. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the automatic switching state. Do as follows: a. Handle the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD alarm that the equipment reports. After the alarms are cleared, wait until the MSP protocol is changed from the automatic switching state to the normal state. Then, check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared. Check whether the service board configured with the MSP protocol is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board and then check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

3.

b.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

c.

Check the system control and cross-connect board is faulty. If yes, replace the system control and cross-connect board, and then check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.13 APS_MANUAL_STOP
Description
The APS_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the MSP protocol is stopped manually.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. l 0x01: linear MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


When the APS_MANUAL_STOP alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switching may fail.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Enable/Disable the linear MSP protocol.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC
Description
The ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of unknown cells exceeds the specified threshold in a time unit. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (2.5s), the number of unknown cells crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


An unknown cell is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: PW control words mismatch. Cause 2: PW types mismatch. Cause 3: Fragments are received on the network side.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the configuration at the two ends of the PW is consistent. If not, modify the configuration. Step 2 Check whether connections are correct. If not, reconnect fibers or reconfigure connections. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.15 AU_AIS
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The AU_AIS is an alarm indicating the administrative unit (AU). This alarm occurs when the board detects the AU pointer of all 1s for three consecutive frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the AU_AIS alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm. If... The alarm that triggers the AU_AIS insertion occurs No such alarms that trigger the AU_AIS insertion occur Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located or the IF board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced 2. Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to the next step. Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to Cause 2.

Replace the system control board on the opposite NE.

Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.16 AU_LOP
Description
The AU_LOP is an alarm indicating the loss of the AU pointer. This alarm occurs when a board detects the AU pointer of invalid values or with the NDF for eight consecutive frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the AU_LOP alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced 2. Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to the next step.

Replace the system control board on the opposite NE.

Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.17 B1_EXC
Description
The B1_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B1 errors (in the regenerator section) exceed the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed the preset B1_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by using the self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the B1_EXC alarm occurs, the services on the port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity. 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber. 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... The clock may become asynchronous and B1 errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.18 B1_SD
Description
The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B1 errors (in the regenerator section). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed the preset B1_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) but do not reach the preset B1_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default). An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by using the self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the B1_SD alarm occurs, the service performance on the port degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... The clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The SDH optical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.19 B2_EXC
Description
The B2_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B2 errors (in the multiplex section) exceed the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors exceeds the preset B2_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l l l

Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... The clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.20 B2_SD
Description
The B2_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B2 errors (in the multiplex section). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors is higher than the preset B2_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset B2_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service performance on the port degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... The clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.21 B3_EXC
Description
The B3_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B3 errors (in the higher order path) exceed the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors exceeds the preset B3_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the B3_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

3.

If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... In this case, the clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.22 B3_EXC_VC3
Description
The B3_EXC_VC3 alarm indicates that the number of B3 bit errors in a VC-3 path crosses the threshold. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errors crosses the B3_EXC_VC3 alarm threshold (10-3, by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The services in the alarmed path have a large number of bit errors.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). Cause 4: A board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. 1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, or B3_SD alarms. If yes, clear the higher-level alarms. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists

Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local site meet the specifications of the optical ports. For details, see Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power at the opposite site is Replace the optical module at the too low opposite site. The transmit power at the opposite site is A fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power at the local site is close to the receiver sensitivity (for example, a difference within 3 dB) 2. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment. If... The number of bit errors changes The number of bit errors does not change 3. Then... Go to the next step. Go to Cause 4.

If a fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed, and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. If yes, clean or replace the fiber connector, or replace the fiber jumper. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). 1. 2. Check whether the cable grounding, cable connectors, and cables are damaged. If yes, replace the faulty cables. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty. 1. Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path. If... The fault is not rectified after the Ethernet port is looped back
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Then... Replace the alarmed Ethernet processing board at the local site.
248

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The fault is rectified after the Ethernet Replace the Ethernet processing board at port is looped back the opposite site. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.23 B3_SD
Description
The B3_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B3 errors (in the higher order path). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors is higher than the preset B3_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset B3_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service performance on the port degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The transmit power of the opposite NE is Replace the board where the SDH over low optical interface unit is located on the opposite NE. The transmit power of the opposite NE is The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power of the local NE is close to the value (for example, within 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity 2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of a channel to locate the fault. If... Then...

The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. The errors do not vary with the change of the Ensure that the board is normal. fiber 3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed, and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board). 1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated. If yes, clear the alarm.

Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades. 1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE. If... The clock source of the local NE is different from the clock source of the opposite NE Then... In this case, the clock may become asynchronous and errors may occur. Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure that the clock is synchronized on the local NE and opposite NE.

The clock of the local NE and the clock This may cause errors and even service of the opposite NE form a timing loop interruption. In this case, reconfigure the clock source and release the timing loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board). 1. The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault. If... Then...

The fault is not rectified after the optical Replace the board where the alarmed interfaces are looped back line unit is located on the local NE. The fault is rectified after the optical interfaces are looped back Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.

Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE. If... The fault is not rectified after the multiplexing interface is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed IF board on the local NE.

The fault is rectified after the multiplexing Replace the alarmed IF board on the interface is looped back opposite NE. ----End

Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port. Handle the errors of TDM services.

A.3.24 B3_SD_VC3
Description
The B3_SD_VC3 alarm indicates a signal degrade (SD) condition caused by excessive B3 bit errors in VC-3 paths. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errors crosses the B3_SD_VC3 alarm threshold (10-6, by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


When the B3_SD_VC3 alarm occurs, the services in the alarmed path deteriorate.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). Cause 4: A board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system. 1. 2. Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, or B3_SD alarms. If yes, clear the higher-level alarms. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port). 1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local site meet the specifications of the optical ports. For details, see Browsing Current Performance Events. If... Then...

The transmit power at the opposite site is Replace the optical module at the too low opposite site. The transmit power at the opposite site is A fiber is faulty. Go to the next step. normal, but the receive power at the local site is close to the receiver sensitivity (for example, a difference within 3 dB) 2. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment. If... The number of bit errors changes The number of bit errors does not change 3. Then... Go to the next step. Go to Cause 4.

If a fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the optical distribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed, and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. If yes, clean or replace the fiber connector, or replace the fiber jumper. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.
252

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port). 1. 2. Check whether the cable grounding, cable connectors, and cables are damaged. If yes, replace the faulty cables. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty. 1. Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path. If... The fault is not rectified after the Ethernet port is looped back Then... Replace the alarmed Ethernet processing board at the local site. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

The fault is rectified after the Ethernet Replace the Ethernet processing board at port is looped back the opposite site. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.25 BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The BAT1TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the temperature sensor of battery group 1 fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The temperature data of battery group 1 cannot be collected.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 1 is faulty. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 1 is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the temperature sensor of battery group 1. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the cabinet. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1. 2. Replace damaged cables. Connect cables correctly.

Step 4 Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed. 1. Install the temperature sensor.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.26 BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The BAT2TEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the temperature sensor of battery group 2 fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The temperature data of battery group 2 cannot be collected.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 2 is faulty. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The temperature sensor of battery group 2 is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the temperature sensor of battery group 2. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the cabinet. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1. 2. Replace damaged cables. Connect cables correctly.

Step 4 Cause 4: The temperature sensor is not installed. 1. Install the board temperature sensor.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.27 BD_NOT_INSTALLED
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The BD_NOT_INSTALLED is an alarm indicating that the physical board is installed in a certain slot, but the logical board is not added.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicates the ID of the slot.

Impact on the System


When the BD_NOT_INSTALLED alarm occurs, the physical board in this slot cannot work.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot. 1. Configure the logical board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.28 BD_STATUS
Description
The BD_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board is not in position.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the BD_STATUS alarm occurs, the alarmed board fails to work.

Possible Causes
If the alarm is reported by a board of the IDU, the possible causes are as follows: l l l l Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrect slot. Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are not connected properly. Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty. Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty.

If the alarm is reported by the ODU, the possible causes are as follows: l l Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated. Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrect slot. 1. Check whether the logical slot and physical slot of the alarmed board are consistent. For details, see 8.3.2 Checking the Board Status. If... The alarmed board is installed in an incorrect slot The alarmed board is installed in a correct slot Then... Install the board in a correct slot. Ensure that the board and the backplane are connected properly.

Step 2 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are not connected properly. 1. Remove and insert the alarmed board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.


257

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm persists after the board is removed and inserted

Then... Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 3 Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty. 1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the fault of the slot.
TIP

Generally, the slot becomes faulty due to the broken pin or bent pin. Remove the board, and use a torch to observe whether there is any broken pin or bent pin.

2.

If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot and add the board again. Then, the board can work normally.

Step 4 Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Ensure that the slot is normal.

Step 5 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated. 1. Query whether the IF board reports the HARD_BAD, BD_STATUS, IF_CABLE_OPEN, BD_NOT_INSTALLED or VOLT_LOS alarm. If... The IF board reports any of the preceding alarms The IF board does not report any of the preceding alarms Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Replace the alarmed ODU.

Step 6 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed ODU.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.29 BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The BDTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the board temperature sensor of the cabinet fails.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The board temperature data of the TCU cannot be collected.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The board temperature sensor is faulty. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Cause 4: The board temperature sensor is not installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board temperature sensor is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the board temperature sensor. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the cabinet. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1. 2. Replace damaged cables. Connect cables correctly.

Step 4 Cause 4: The board temperature sensor is not installed. 1. Install the board temperature sensor.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.30 BIP_EXC
Description
The BIP_EXC is an alarm indicating that the BIP errors exceed the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) exceeds the preset BIP_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the BIP_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link along which the E1 service signal travels. If yes, clear the alarm immediately. The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows: B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, RPS_INDI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD. If... There is any of the preceding alarms No such alarms occur Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service signal. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.

Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 1. Replace the Hybrid IF board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Related Information
Handle the errors of TDM services. The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-3 when EMS6 board report the alarm. Table A-3 Alarm Parameters of EMS6 Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in path 1.

A.3.31 BIP_SD
Description
The BIP_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the BIP errors. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) is higher than the preset BIP_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset BIP_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the BIP_SD alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link along which the E1 service signal travels. If yes, clear the alarm immediately. The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows: B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, RPS_INDI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD. If... There is any of the preceding alarms No such alarms occur Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 1. Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service signal. If... An alarm occurs No alarm occurs Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Ensure that the board is normal.

Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board). 1. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists

Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board). 1. Replace the Hybrid IF board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and cross-connect board.

Related Information
Handle the errors of TDM services. The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-4 when EMS6 board report the alarm. Table A-4 Alarm Parameters of EMS6 Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in path 1.

A.3.32 BOOTROM_BAD
Description
The BOOTROM_BAD is an alarm indicating that the BOOTROM data consistency check fails. This alarm occurs when the BOOTROM data is damaged during a periodical check by the system.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicates the type of the BOOTROM damage. l 0x00, 0x01: damage of the basic BIOS l 0x00, 0x02: damage of the extended BIOS Parameter 4, Parameter 5 The values are always 0xff 0xff.

Impact on the System


When the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work. l l When the NE is already started, the BOOTROM_BAD alarm does not affect the system and services. If the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs and a hard reset is performed on a board, the board fails to load the BIOS and cannot be started.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The basic BIOS is damaged. Cause 2: The extended BIOS is damaged. Cause 3: The BOOTROM database is damaged. Cause 4: The system control switch and timing board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Replace the alarmed board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.33 BUS_ERR
Description
The BUS_ERR alarm indicates bus errors. This alarm occurs when the bus becomes abnormal.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicates the ID of the board that has errors.

Impact on the System


When the BUS_ERR alarm occurs, the services that travel along the faulty bus are interrupted or have errors.

Possible Causes
The possible causes of the BUS_ERR alarm are as follows: l l Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted. 1. Remove and insert the board.

Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board.

Related Information
The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-5 when EMS6 board report the alarm.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Table A-5 Alarm parameters of EMS6 Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the bus error type. 0x10: The Serdes bus of the GE bridge is faulty.

A.3.34 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN
Description
The CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN is an alarm indicating that the locking function of CES ACR service clock is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
Name Meaning

Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Indicate the index of PW that carries the services associated with the ACR clock source. Parameter 5 Indicates clock mode. l 0x01: tracing mode. l 0x02: holdover mode. l 0x03: free-run mode. Parameter 6 Indicates whether the clock is locked. l 0x00: unlocked. l 0x01: locked.

Impact on the System


Service quality is affected.

Possible Causes
l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms. Cause 2: The network is unstable. Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms. 1. 2. Query the CES services associated with the ACR clock source. For details, see Configuring the Primary Clock for an ACR Clock Domain. Check whether these services have alarms. For details, see 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms. Check for jitters and delays on the network. Query service performance statistics. For details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events. Analyze service performance statistics. If the network is unstable, rectify the faults on the network, or switch the affected services to a stable network. Query alarms reported by the NEs on the service path. For details, see 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms. Handle the alarms. For details, see A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures.

Step 2 Cause 2: The network is unstable. 1. 2.

Step 3 Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal. 1. 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.35 CES_JTROVR_EXC
Description
The CES_JTROVR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer overflows crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, the number of jitter buffer overflows per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The buffer area does not have sufficient space for the received frames. As a result, packets are discarded.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value. 1. 2. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.

Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized. 1. Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.36 CES_JTRUDR_EXC
Description
The CES_JTRUDR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer underflows crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of jitter buffer underflows per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, no packets are available in the buffer area for transmission. As a result, underflows occur in the buffer area.

Possible Causes
l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized. Cause 3: The link is looped. Cause 4: The link is congested.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized. 1. Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.

Step 3 Cause 3: The link is looped. 1. Release the loop. Step 4 Cause 4: The link is congested. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

Step 5 Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value. 1. 2. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.37 CES_LOSPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_LOSPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of lost packets of CES services crosses the threshold in a time unit. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of lost packets per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, all 1s are inserted and services are interrupted.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The link is looped. Cause 3: The link is congested.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped. 1. Release the loop. Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
Packets are lost when the sequence numbers of received packets are greater than expected.

A.3.38 CES_MALPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_MALPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of deformed frames in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of deformed frames in CES services crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


A deformed frame is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW. 1. Set the RTP head enabling status to the same on the two ends of the PW. For details, see Modifying CES Service Parameters. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.

Step 2 Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link. 1.

----End

Related Information
If a CESoPSN frame contains valid TDM data and does not contain any error indication, but the size of the CESoPSN frame is not consistent with the specified size, a deformed CESoPSN frame is generated.

A.3.39 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a unit time, the number of lost disordered packets crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of lost disordered packets per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The packets are disordered. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The link is looped. Cause 3: The link is congested.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 1. 1.

See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Release the loop. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped. Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.

----End

Related Information
Packets are disordered when the sequence numbers of received packets are smaller than expected.

A.3.40 CES_RDI
Description
The CES_RDI is an alarm of remote defect indication. When the CES_LOSPKT_EXC alarm is reported at the remote end, the remote end sets the R bit in control word to 1. Upon receiving a packet in which the R bit is 1, the local end reports the CES_RDI alarm.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The packet loss rate at the remote end crosses the specified threshold.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. Cause 2: The link is looped. Cause 3: The link is congested.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link. 1. 1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link. Release the loop.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272

Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.41 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_STRAYPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of errored packets in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period (10s), the number of errored packets in CES services per second crosses the specified threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


An errored packet is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: Links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Links are misconnected. 1. Check the link configuration and rectify the fault.

----End

Related Information
Incorrect packets are received when the tracing source field in the RTP head is different from expected.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.42 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT
Description
The CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT is an alarm indicating that the AC circuit on the remote NE is faulty. On detection of an AC circuit fault, the remote NE sets the L bit in the control word to 1. When receiving a packet in which the L bit is 1, the local NE reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT alarm.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE reports the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, LFA, LMFA, R_LOS, R_LOF, or MS_AIS alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the remote NE reports the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, LFA, LMFA, R_LOS, R_LOF, or MS_AIS alarm. 1. If yes, handle these alarms.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.43 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI
Description
The CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI is a remote alarm indication. On detection of the RAI alarm, the remote NE sets the L bit of the control word to 0 and the M field of the control word to 10. When receiving the packet in which the L bit is 0 and the M field is 10, the local NE reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI alarm.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services in the downstream direction of the remote NE are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm. 1. Clear the ALM_E1RAI alarm on the remote NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.44 CFCARD_FAILED
Description
The CFCARD_FAILED is an alarm indicating that the operation on the CF card fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the CFCARD_FAILED alarm occurs, the database cannot be backed up to the CF card or be restored from the CF card. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized. Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match. Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty, and the file system of the CF card fails to be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized. Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match. 1. Replace the CF card and check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Yes No Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty, and the file system of the CF card fails to be created. 1. 2. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication board. If yes, perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Yes No ----End Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the system control and communication board.

Related Information
None.

A.3.45 CFCARD_OFFLINE
Description
The CFCARD_OFFLINE is an alarm indicating that the CF card is out of service.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the CFCARD_OFFLINE alarm occurs, the database cannot be backed up to the CF card or be restored from the CF card. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted. Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board. Cause 3: The CF card is faulty. Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted. 1. Check whether the CF card is installed on the system control and communication board. If... No Yes Then... Install the CF card. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board. 1. 2. Check whether the CF card is loosened. If yes, re-insert the CF card. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Yes No Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The CF card is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the CF card. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Yes No Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Step 4 Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty. 1. 2. 3. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication board. If yes, perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, replace the system control and communication board.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.46 CHCS
Description
The CHCS is an alarm indicating the correctable cell error. When a correctable bit error is detected in the cell header, the CHCS alarm occurs.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the CHCS alarm occurs, the services are not affected. The alarm only indicates that some cells with a bit error are detected during cell delimitation at the ATM port.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM port. Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM port. 1. 2. 3. On the NMS, check whether the receive tunnel reports any alarms about excessive bit errors, such as B1_SD, B2_SD, and B3_SD. On the NMS, check whether the service is looped. If yes, modify the service configuration to release the loop, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the CHCS alarm and check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 8.6.1 Cold Reset. Optional: If the CHCS alarm persists after the cold reset, replace the alarmed board and check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.
NOTE

Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty. 1. 2.

Board replacement is not recommended because the alarm does not affect the services.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.47 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE
Description
The CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE alarm indicates that a clock source is not in locked mode. This alarm is reported when the current clock does not trace any clock sources.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the clock mode. l 0x01: holdover l 0x02: free-run

Impact on the System


When the clock source is not in the locked mode, the system clock is not of high quality. Services may have bit errors when the clocks of the NEs are not synchronized. Pointer justification may occur in TDM services. If a base station traces a clock that is carried by an Ethernet service, an alarm indicating a large clock frequency deviation may occur.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured. Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured. 1. Configure the system clock source priority table. For details, see Configuring the Clock Sources.

Step 2 Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Troubleshoot the synchronization sources that are listed in the clock source priority table. If... The synchronization source is an external clock The synchronization source is a line clock The synchronization source is an IF clock The synchronization source is a tributary clock The synchronization source is an Ethernet clock Then... Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm. Handle the alarm that occurs on the line board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributary board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the Ethernet board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.48 COMMUN_FAIL
Description
The COMMUN_FAIL is an alarm indicating the inter-board communication failure. This alarm is reported when the communication between a board and the SCC board is interrupted.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the port. The value is always 0x01.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

280

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the path on which the alarm is generated. Parameter 2 is always 0x00. Parameter 3 has the following meanings: l 0x03: inter-board Ethernet communication Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Parameters 4 and 5 are reserved, and their values are always 0xFF.

Impact on the System


The NE configuration cannot be delivered to the board or the board cannot work. Consequently, the services cannot be configured or the protection switching function is unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: A certain board is reset. Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly. Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. Cause 4: A slot is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is reset. 1. After you reset the board, the alarm disappears automatically. Step 2 Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly. 1. Remove and insert the alarmed board. For details, see 6.1 Removing a Board and 6.2 Inserting a Board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm disappears after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is replaced. Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6 Part Replacement. If... The alarm disappears after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is generated when a slot is faulty.
281

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Clear the alarm according to the solution for the alarm that is generated when a board is faulty.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 4 Cause 3: A slot is faulty. 1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the faulty slot.
TIP

The slot becomes faulty due to broken pins or bent pins. Remove the board, and use a torch to check whether any pins are broken or bent.

2.

If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot, and then update the data on the NMS so that the board can work normally.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.49 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
Description
The CONFIG_NOSUPPORT is an alarm indicating that the configuration is not supported. This alarm is reported if the ODU detects that the specified parameters do not meet the requirements of the ODU.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates that the configuration data does not meet the requirements. l 0x01: The frequency is set incorrectly. l 0x02: The T/R spacing is set incorrectly. l 0x03: The transmit power is set incorrectly. l 0x04: The ATPC threshold is set incorrectly. l 0x05: The bandwidth is set incorrectly. l 0x06: The modulation mode is set incorrectly.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

282

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm occurs, the ODU fails to work normally. If the equipment is configured with the 1+1 FD protection, the active ODU generates the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm. In this case, the IF 1+1 protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements. Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. (This cause can be verified only when Parameter 1 is 0x03.)
NOTE

Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met: The AM function is enabled on the radio link; the transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power in AM guaranteed capacity mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements. 1. Determine the parameter that does not meet the requirement according to the alarm parameter. Then, handle the fault accordingly. If... Then...

The alarm parameter takes a value from Perform the operation described in Step 0x01 to 0x03 1.2. The alarm parameter takes a value from Perform the operation described in Step 0x04 to 0x06 1.3. 2. Check whether the parameters of the ODU interface meet the requirements of network planning. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If... The parameters meet the requirements of network planning The parameters do not meet the requirements of network planning 3. Then... Use the ODU of the proper model. Modify the ODU interface parameters.

Check whether the parameters of the IF interface meet the requirements of network planning. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If... Then...

The parameters meet the requirements of Replace the IF board. network planning The parameters do not meet the requirements of network planning Modify the IF interface parameters. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.

Step 2 Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. (This cause can be verified only when Parameter 1 is 0x03.) 1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Verify that the alarm is caused by incorrect change of AM parameters.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met: l The AM function is enabled on the radio link. l The transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power in AM guaranteed capacity mode If... Then...

The conditions are met and the transmit Perform a cold reset for the alarmed power needs to be changed ODU. The conditions are met but the transmit Change the parameters of ODU interfaces power does not need to be changed to recover the original value of transmit power. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.50 DBMS_ABNORMAL
Description
The DBMS_ABNORMAL is an alarm indicating that the database status is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the cause of the alarm. l 0x01: NVRAM is faulty. l 0x02: Space is insufficient. l 0x03: Transaction commit times out. l 0x04: A database is deleted.

Impact on the System


If data changes are made after this alarm occurs, data changes cannot take effect.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: NVRAM is faulty. Cause 2: Space is insufficient. Cause 3: Transaction commit times out. Cause 4: A database is deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 Reset the alarmed board. Step 2 Check whether the alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.51 DBMS_ERROR
Description
The DBMS_ERROR is an alarm indicating that errors occur in the processing of the system database.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the DBMS_ERROR alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The database processing fails or the database is damaged. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The database processing fails or the database is damaged. 1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Reset the system control board.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm is cleared after the board is reset The alarm persists after the board is reset Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1.

Then... End the fault handling. Ensure that the system control board is normal.

6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.52 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE
Description
The DBMS_PROTECT_MODE is an alarm indicating that the system database is in protection mode.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing and the system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for some query and setting commands, and some system functions are unavailable.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software. 1. 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.53 DCNSIZE_OVER
Description
The DCNSIZE_OVER is an alarm indicating an over-sized DCN network.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the size of the DCN network.

Impact on the System


l l Some NEs become unreachable to the NMS because DCN packets cannot be forwarded timely due to insufficient CPU resources. The DCN network is prone to route flapping and storms.

Possible Causes
Cause: The size of the DCN network crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The size of the DCN network crosses the preset threshold. 1. Replan the DCN network based on actual networking conditions.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.54 DDN_LFA
Description
The DDN_LFA is an alarm indicating loss of basic frame alignment for framed E1 services. This alarm occurs when DDN side fails to receive the basic frame alignment signal for framed E1 services.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


E1 services on the alarmed board are unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty. Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly. Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty. 1. 1. 1. 2. Troubleshoot the interconnected user equipment. Set the E1 frame format of the local port to the same as that of the opposite port. Check whether the alarmed board also reports any hardware alarms, such as HARD_BAD. If yes, perform a cold reset on the alarmed board and check whether the DDN_LFA alarm is cleared. Step 2 Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly. Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults.

CAUTION
If the service on the board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes service interruptions. 3. If the alarm persists, replace the board.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
Basic frame As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS) or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).

A.3.55 DOWN_E1_AIS
Description
The DOWN_E1_AIS is an alarm of the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal. This alarm occurs when the tributary board detects the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal of all 1s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the DOWN_E1_AIS alarm occurs, the E1 signal in the alarmed path is unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm. Cause 2: On the local NE, the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and cross-connect board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm. 1. Check whether the opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm. If... Then...

The opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AIS Clear the alarm immediately. or T_ALOS alarm The opposite NE does not report the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm Ensure that the board on the local NE is normal.

Step 2 Cause 2: On the local NE, the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and crossconnect board is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board on the local NE.

----End

Related Information
If EFP8 reports the alarm, the alarm parameters have the meanings listed inTable A-6. Table A-6 Alarm Parameters of EFP8 Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning 0x01, indicates optical interface number. Indicates the number of the path.

A.3.56 DROPRATIO_OVER
Description
The DROPRATIO_OVER alarm indicates that the number of lost packets crosses the threshold when queue congestion occurs at a port. This alarm is reported when the ratio of lost packets on an object under performance monitoring is higher than the expected ratio.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the direction in which traffic crosses the threshold. l 0x00: Traffic crosses the threshold in the receive direction. l 0x01: Traffic crosses the threshold in the transmit direction.

Impact on the System


Service packet loss occurs.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect. Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or committed information rate (CIR).

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect. 1. 1. Check and reconfigure services according to the network plan. 8.17 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports. If traffic is large, check whether a network storm has occurred, and eliminate the source that illegally sends a large amount of data. If the port bandwidth is too low, follow instructions in Modifying Port Policies to increase port bandwidth or expand the network. Step 2 Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or CIR.

2.

----End

Related Information
If packet loss is indicated in the receive direction, check the method of handling red packets in the traffic classification configuration. If the method of handling red packets is non-discard, packets may not be actually lost in the receive direction.

A.3.57 E1_LOC
Description
The E1_LOC is an alarm indicating that the uplink 2M clock is lost. This alarm occurs when the tributary board fails to extract the clock from the E1 signal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the E1_LOC occurs, the service is not affected.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty. Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty. Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty. 1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.

Step 2 Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect. 1. Redo the cable.

Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located.

Step 4 Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform. 1. Check whether any external interference causes the abnormal waveform of the E1 signal. If... There is the external interference There is no external interference ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Contact Huawei engineers.

Related Information
None.

A.3.58 E1_LOS
Description
The E1_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of the E1 signal. This alarm occurs when the tributary board detects the uplink E1 signal of all 0s.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the E1_LOS alarm occurs, the E1 service is interrupted.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty. Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty. Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty. 1. Check whether the cable is connected properly. If... The cable is not connected properly The cable is prepared incorrectly Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty. 1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE. Then... Connect the cable properly. Redo the cable.

Step 3 Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the tributary unit is located.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.59 ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The ENVHUM_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the ambient humidity sensor of the cabinet fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The ambient humidity data of the PMU cannot be collected.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The ambient humidity sensor is faulty. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Cause 4: The ambient humidity sensor is not installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ambient humidity sensor is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the ambient humidity sensor. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the cabinet. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1. 2. Replace damaged cables. Connect cables correctly.

Step 4 Cause 4: The ambient humidity sensor is not installed. 1. Install the ambient humidity sensor.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.60 ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The ENVTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the ambient temperature sensor of the cabinet fails.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The ambient temperature data of the TCU cannot be collected.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The ambient temperature sensor is faulty. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Cause 4: The ambient temperature sensor is not installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ambient temperature sensor is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the ambient temperature sensor. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the cabinet. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1. 2. Replace damaged cables. Connect cables correctly.

Step 4 Cause 4: The ambient temperature sensor is not installed. 1. Install the ambient temperature sensor.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.61 ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The ENVTEMP1_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that ambient temperature sensor 1 of the cabinet fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Ambient temperature data 1 of the PMU cannot be collected.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is faulty. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is not installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is faulty. 1. 2. Replace ambient temperature sensor 1. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the cabinet. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Then... End the alarm handling.


296

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm persists

Then... Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1. 2. 1. Replace damaged cables. Connect cables correctly. Install ambient temperature sensor 1.

Step 4 Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 1 is not installed.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.62 ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The ENVTEMP2_SENSOR_FAIL is an alarm indicating that ambient temperature sensor 2 of the cabinet fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Ambient temperature data 2 of the PMU cannot be collected.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is faulty. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is not installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is faulty. 1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Replace ambient temperature sensor 2. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm clears The alarm persists

Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the cabinet. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1. 2. 1. Replace damaged cables. Connect cables correctly. Install ambient temperature sensor 2.

Step 4 Cause 4: Ambient temperature sensor 2 is not installed.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.63 ETH_APS_LOST
Description
The ETH_APS_LOST is an alarm indicating that the APS frame is lost. This alarm occurs when no APS frame is received from the protection channel.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the APS protection may fail.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l l

Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated. Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection. 1. On the NMS, check whether the opposite NE is configured with the APS protection. For details, see Querying MPLS APS Status. If... The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection The opposite NE is configured with the APS protection 2. 3. 1. Then... Go to the next step. Go to Cause 2.

Create a matching APS protection group on the opposite NE, and activate the APS protocol. Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, proceed to cause 4. Check whether the APS protocol is activated at both ends. If... The APS protocol is deactivated at one end The APS protocol is activated at both ends Then... Activate the APS protocol at the end. Go to Cause 3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated.

2. 1.

Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 3. On the NMS, check whether the settings of the APS protection group are the same at the two ends. If the settings differ between the two ends, change them to the same. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends. Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 4. Check whether the protection channel reports an alarm related to signal loss or signal degrade, such as ETH_LOS. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.

Step 3 Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.

2. 1.

Step 4 Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.64 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH
Description
The ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the working and protection paths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. This alarm is reported when the working and protection paths of one APS protection group at one end are different from those at the other end.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, service protection fails.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends. 1. 2. 3. Check whether the APS settings at the two ends are the same. For details, see Querying MPLS APS Status. If the APS settings are different, change the settings to the same. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly. 1. Check whether the fiber or cable is correctly connected between the two ends. If not, connect the fiber or cable properly.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.65 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
Description
The ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL is an alarm of a protection switching failure. This alarm is reported when the request signal in the transmitted Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame is different from the bridge signal in the received APS frame and this symptom lasts for 50 ms.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

300

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, service protection fails.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. 1. Change the settings to the same. For details, see Creating an MPLS APS Protection Group. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.66 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH
Description
The ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH is an alarm of protection scheme mismatch. This alarm is reported when the information in the received Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame is different from the APS settings at the local end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the specific difference. l 0x01: Indicates that the switching type is different. l 0x02: Indicates that the switching direction is different. l 0x03: Indicates that the revertive mode is different.

Impact on the System


This alarm may cause the APS protection failure, and therefore the service protection fails.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The switching type is different. Cause 2: The switching direction is different. Cause 3: The revertive mode is different.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the possible cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters. 1. Change the settings of the APS protection group to the same at the two ends. For details, see Querying MPLS APS Status. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.67 ETH_CFM_LOC
Description
The ETH_CFM_LOC is an alarm indicating the loss of connectivity. This alarm occurs when the system fails to receive the CCM packet from the remote MEP in 3.5 connectivity check (CC) periods successively.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID)

Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.

Impact on the System


l l When the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm occurs, the LB and LT detection functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable. The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted. Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is faulty. Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted. 1. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables and fibers) between the standard MEPs are connected properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The physical links are connected improperly The physical links are connected properly

Then... Connect the physical links properly. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is faulty. 1. Check whether Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEP belongs is configured correctly. If... Then...

The service is configured incorrectly Modify the configuration of the service to ensure consistency at two ends. The service is configured correctly Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network. 1. Check the utilization of bandwidth. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
The Table A-7 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. Table A-7 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.

Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Parameter 17

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

304

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 18

Meaning Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 19, Parameter 20

Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.


NOTE If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK, these parameters are not supported.

A.3.68 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
Description
The ETH_CFM_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating an incorrect connection. This alarm occurs when the system receives the CCM packet whose MA mismatches or whose priority is lower.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
305

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 7 (Direction)

Meaning Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.

Parameter 8 (Level)

Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_CFM_MISMERGE alarm occurs, the service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted, and the data flow may be routed incorrectly.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent. Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to are different. Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent. 1. Check whether the names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standard MEPs correspond to are consistent. If... Then...

The names are inconsistent Set the other names of maintenance domain and maintenance alliance to ensure consistency at both ends. The names are consistent Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to are different.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Check whether the MD levels of the standard MEPs are the same. If... Then...

The levels are different Set the MD levels again to ensure consistency at both ends. The levels are the same Go to Cause 3. Step 3 Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect. 1. Check the physical connection of the Ethernet service route and rectify the fault of the physical connection if any.

----End

Related Information
The Table A-8 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. Table A-8 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.

Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Parameter 17

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

307

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 18

Meaning Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

A.3.69 ETH_CFM_RDI
Description
The ETH_CFM_RDI is an alarm indicating the CCM packet with RDI received from the remote MEP. This alarm occurs when the system receives the CCM packet with RDI from the remote maintenance end point (MEP).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 7 (Direction)

Meaning Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.

Parameter 8 (Level)

Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low). l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium). l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high). l 0x03: provider MEP level (low). l 0x04: provider MEP level (high). l 0x05: operator MEP level (low). l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium). l 0x07: operator MEP level (high).
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID)

Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.

Impact on the System


l l When the ETH_CFM_RDI alarm occurs, the loopback (LB) and link trace (LT) detection functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable. The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet. 1. 2. Determine the alarmed port according to the alarm parameter. Check whether the remote MEP that is connected to the port reports the ETH_CFM_MISMERGE, ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI, or ETH_CFM_LOC alarm.

----End

Related Information
The Table A-9 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

309

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Table A-9 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Parameter 17

Parameter 19, Parameter 20

Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.


NOTE If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK, these parameters are not supported.

A.3.70 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
Description
The ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI is an alarm indicating the errored frame. This alarm occurs when the system receives invalid CCM packets.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

310

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3, Parameter 4 (Port) Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Parameter 7 (Direction) Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction. Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

Impact on the System


l l When the ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI alarm occurs, the LB and LT detection functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable. The service may become abnormal due to the loop.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured. Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. For example, the connectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured. 1. Check whether the remote MEP is configured. If not, configure the remote MEP first.

Step 2 Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. For example, the connectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict. 1. Check whether the CC periods set at the MEPs are the same. If... Then...

The CC periods are different Change the CC periods to ensure consistency at both ends. The CC periods are the same Go to the next step. 2. Check whether the IDs of the MEPs in the maintenance domain are in conflict. If... The IDs are in conflict The IDs are not in conflict Then... Change the conflicting IDs. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received. 1. Check whether any loop exists at each IP port of the service trail. If yes, release the loop and clear the alarm.

----End

Related Information
The Table A-10 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reported by the EoS/EoPDH plane. Table A-10 Alarm Parameters Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Meaning MD MA MEP ID Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. When these parameters indicate the VCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 0x10) + 0x80. Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.

Parameter 15, Parameter 16

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

312

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 17

Meaning Indicates the direction of the local MEP. l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive. l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction. l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.

Parameter 18

Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low) l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium) l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high) l 0x03: provider MEP level (low) l 0x04: provider MEP level (high) l 0x05: operator MEP level (low) l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium) l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)
NOTE Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates the supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.

A.3.71 ETH_EFM_DF
Description
The ETH_EFM_DF is an alarm indicating negotiation failure. This alarm occurs when the pointto-point OAM protocol negotiation fails at the Ethernet port.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

313

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails. l 0x01: The local link is faulty. l 0x02: The local end fails to receive any OAM packets in a specified period. l 0x03: The OAM settings of the opposite end do not meet the requirements of the local end. l 0x04: The OAM settings of the local end do not meet the requirements of the opposite end.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_EFM_DF alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. 1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the board where the Ethernet port is located.

Step 2 Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. 1. Enable the point to point OAM protocol at the opposite end.

Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent. 1. Reconfigure the point to point OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.72 ETH_EFM_EVENT
Description
The ETH_EFM_EVENT is an alarm indicating the performance event reported on the opposite NE. This alarm occurs when the local end receives the link error indication packet (OAMPDUM) from the opposite end.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

314

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of the link event. l 0x01: errored symbol period. l 0x02: errored frame. l 0x03: errored frame period. l 0x04: errored frame seconds summary.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_EFM_EVENT alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty. Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty. 1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the board where the Ethernet port is located.

Step 2 Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty. 1. Rectify the fault of the equipment at the opposite end.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.73 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK is an alarm indicating the loopback. This alarm occurs when the local end initiates a loopback or responds to a loopback request from the opposite end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the state of the loopback. l 0x01: The local end initiates a loopback. l 0x02: The local end responds to a loop request from the opposite end.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port is looped back.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback. Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback. 1. According to the alarm parameter, it is determined that the local end initiates a loopback. Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the local end and release the loopback as soon as possible. According to the alarm parameter, it is determined that the opposite end initiates a loopback. Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the opposite port and release the loopback as soon as possible.

Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.74 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
Description
The ETH_EFM_REMFAULT is an alarm indicating the fault on the opposite NE. This alarm occurs when the local end receives the fault indication packet (OAMPDUM) from the opposite end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the fault type at the opposite end. l 0x01: link fault. l 0x02: dying gasp. l 0x03: critical event.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_EFM_REMFAULT alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset. Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset. 1. Check whether the opposite NE is reset frequently. If... The opposite NE is reset frequently
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Then... Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.


317

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The opposite NE is not reset frequently Reset the opposite NE, and the alarm is cleared. Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty. 1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.75 ETH_LOS
Description
The ETH_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of Ethernet port connection.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the ETH_LOS alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes. Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty. Cause 3: The local NE is faulty. Cause 4: The opposite NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes. 1. Check whether the transmit port and receive port work in the same mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

318

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The transmit port and receive port work Correctly set the working modes of the in different modes transmit port and receive port. The transmit port and receive port work Go to Cause 2. in the same mode Step 2 Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty. 1. Check the network cable or fiber jumper connected to the alarmed port. If... The network cable is loose or damaged Then... Connect the network cable properly or replace the damaged network cable.

The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean the connector. The connector or fiber is damaged The connection is normal Step 3 Cause 3: The local NE is faulty. 1. Check whether any fault occurs on the alarmed port. If... The equipment is faulty The equipment is normal Step 4 Cause 4: The opposite NE is faulty. 1. 2. Check whether any fault occurs on the equipment interconnected with the alarmed port. Rectify the fault. Then... Replace the alarmed board on the local NE. Go to Cause 4. Insert the connector properly or replace the damaged fiber jumper. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.76 ETH_NO_FLOW
Description
The ETH_NO_FLOW is an alarm indicating that the Ethernet port has no flow. This alarm is reported when an enabled Ethernet port is in link up state but has no flow.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

319

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the MAC port number.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the path ID. Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and the value is always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits and the value is always 0x01. Parameter 4 Indicates the direction in which the flow is unavailable. l 0x00: Rx direction. l 0x01: Tx direction.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, it indicates that the alarmed port has no flow.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The port is enabled and in link up state, but is configured with no service. Cause 2: The port is enabled and in link up state, but does not transmit any packet due to the service fault at the local end. Cause 3: The port is enabled and in link up state, but does not receive any packet due to the service fault at the remote end.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the MAC port number, alarmed board, and cause according to the parameters. Step 2 Cause 1: No services are configured. 1. Configure the Ethernet service.

Step 3 Cause 2: No services are available. If... No services are available in the transmit direction No services are available in the receive direction ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320

Then... Check whether the service is normal at the local end. Check whether the service is normal at the remote end.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.77 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL
Description
The ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL alarm indicates a discovery failure when the point-to-point ETH-OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the OAM function is enabled at a port of a board and the negotiation between the port and the opposite equipment fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4 Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails. l 0x01: A fault occurs at the local receive link. l 0x02: The local end fails to transmit OAM packets. l 0x03: The OAM packets from the opposite end are not received. l 0x04: The OAM configuration of the opposite end does not meet the requirements of the local end. l 0x05: The OAM configuration of the local end does not meet the requirements of the opposite end. l 0x06-0xff: other unknown reasons.

Impact on the System


The OAM function based on IEEE 802.3ah is unavailable.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

321

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty. 1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the alarmed board.

Step 2 Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end. 1. Enable the P2P OAM protocol at the opposite end. For details, see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function.

Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent. 1. Reconfigure the P2P OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends. For details, see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.78 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT is an alarm indicating that the point-to-point Ethernet OAM detects a critical fault at the remote end. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM function enabled receives the OAM packets that contain critical fault information from the opposite end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

322

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4 Indicates the type of the fault. l 0x01: A link fault occurs at the port of the opposite end. l 0x02: Irrecoverable problems such as the power failure occur at the opposite end. l 0x03-0xff: other faults.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services on the link may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP. Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP. Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the fault type according to Parameter 4. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Parameter 4 is a value from 0x03 to 0xff. Step 2 Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP. 1. Handle the ETH_LOS alarm at the remote port. Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP. 1. Handle the problems such as power failure at the remote MEP, and recover the power supply to the remote MEP.

Step 4 Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP. 1. Contact Huawei technical support engineers.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.79 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP is an alarm indicating that a remote loopback is initiated when the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the local equipment initiates a remote loopback or responds to the remote loopback initiated by the opposite equipment.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. The values are always 0x00 0x01. l 0x01: The loopback is initiated. l 0x02: The loopback is responded.

Impact on the System


The services are looped back between the local equipment and the opposite equipment. The services and other protocol packets are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the command. Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the command.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameters.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02

Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the command. 1. Determine the causes of the loopback at the local end and release the loopback.

Step 3 Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the command. 1. Determine the causes of the loopback at the opposite end and release the loopback.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.80 ETHOAM_RMT_SD
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm indicates that the point-to-point Ethernet-OAM detects the degradation of remote Ethernet performance. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAM function enabled receives link event notification packets from the opposite end.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. The values are always 0x00 0x01.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

325

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 4

Meaning Indicates the type of the received link event. l 0x01: errored frame event l 0x02: errored frame period event l 0x03: errored frame second event

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate. Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. 1. Check whether the link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end. If... If yes If not Then... Disable the link event notification function at the opposite end. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate. 1. Check whether the link performance thresholds of the opposite end are appropriate. If... If not If yes Then... Set the thresholds to appropriate values. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates. 1. Improve the link performance at the opposite end so that the opposite end does not send any link event notification packet to the local end. Then, the alarm at the local end is cleared automatically.

----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

326

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.81 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP is an alarm indicating the loopback of the MAC port that runs the point-to-point OAM protocol. This alarm occurs when the MAC port of a board receives the OAM protocol packet sent by the port itself or the board after the loop detection function is enabled.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environmental alarms

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the loopback type. l 0x01: selfloop of the port. l 0x02: selfloop of the board.

Impact on the System


When the ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP alarm occurs, a network storm may occur due to the loopback.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is connected to a LAN that has a loopback, or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port. Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are connected to the same LAN.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the loopback type according to Parameter 1, and then handle the loopback accordingly. If... The value of Parameter 1 is 0x01
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Then... Go to Cause 1.
327

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The value of Parameter 1 is 0x02

Then... Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is connected to a LAN that has a loopback, or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port. If... The PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port Then... Manually release the PHY/MAC loopback (or wait five minutes for the automatic release by the NE if the automatic loopback release function is enabled on the NE). Then, the selfloop is released. Connect the cable properly to release the selfloop. Release the loopback on the LAN, or break the connection between the port and the LAN, to release the selfloop.

The cable connected to the port is selflooped The port is connected to a LAN that has a loopback

Step 3 Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are connected to the same LAN. 1. Check whether two ports of the board are connected through cables or whether two ports of the board are connected to the same LAN. If... The two ports are connected through cables Then... Disconnect the cables to release the selfloop.

The two ports are connected to the same Break the connection between a port and the network LAN to release the selfloop. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.82 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP alarm indicates that a VCTRUNK port is looped back when the point-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the loopback detection function is enabled and the VCTRUNK port receives the OAM protocol packets transmitted by the port itself or the board where the VCTRUNK port resides.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

328

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the loopback type. l 0x01: The port is self-looped. l 0x02: The board is self-looped. l 0x03-0xff: unknown types.

Impact on the System


If the function of automatic shutdown in the case of a selfloop is enabled at the alarmed port, the services at the alarmed port are interrupted. Otherwise, a network storm may occur.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: A loopback occurs on the lines connected to one VCTRUNK. Cause 2: The lines connected to two VCTRUNKs on the same board are interconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameters. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Step 2 Cause 1: The port is self-looped. 1. 2. Release the loopback at the port. Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK port and ensure that the port is not selflooped. Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2.

Step 3 Cause 2: The board is self-looped.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK ports and ensure that the lines connected to any two VCTRUNK ports on the same board are not interconnected.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.83 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of periodic connectivity check (CC) packets. This alarm occurs when the sink MEP fails to receive CC packets from the same source MEP in a period (3.5 transmission periods of CC packets at the source MEP).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Meaning Indicates the ID of the remote MEP. Indicates the ID of the local MEP. Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. l PORT number, Parameter 9 is 0x00. l VCTRUNK number, Parameter 9 is 0x80. Parameter 11, Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 to Parameter 17 Parameter 18 - Parameter 21 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. Indicates the ID of the remote MEP. Indicates the ID of the local MEP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

330

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


A unidirectional connectivity failure occurs in the Ethernet service between two MEPs.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted. Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty. Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted. 1. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables or optical fibers) that carry services between the two MEPs are correctly connected. If... If not If yes Then... Re-connect the cables to rectify the faults on physical links. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty. 1. Check whether the Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are configured correctly. If... If not If yes Then... Modify the configuration to ensure consistency at both ends. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted. 1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.84 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT is an alarm indicating the conflict of MPIDs. This alarm occurs when two MEPs in one MD have the same maintenance point identity (MPID) and one MEP receives the packets from the other MEP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

331

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Environment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5, Parameter 6 Meaning Indicates the ID of the local MEP. Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. l PORT number, Parameter 9 is 0x00. l VCTRUNK number, Parameter 9 is 0x80. Parameter 7, Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 to Parameter 13 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP. Indicates the MD level of the local MEP. Indicates the ID of the local MEP.

Impact on the System


MPIDs must be unique on a network. When this alarm occurs, the LB and LT functions are abnormal and OAM packets are received incorrectly.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID. 1. 2. Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the associated MP ID according to the alarm parameters. Query the information about the MEP. Delete the incorrect MEPs and create MEPs with unique MP IDs.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.85 EXT_SYNC_LOS
Description
The EXT_SYNC_LOS is an alarm of the loss of the external clock source.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


l When the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm occurs, if only the external clock source and internal clock source are configured in the clock source priority list, the NE traces the internal clock source after the external clock source is lost and enters the free-run state 24 hours later. If another valid clock source of higher priority and good quality is configured in the clock source priority list, however, the clock protection switching occurs.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list, but the external clock source cannot be detected or become invalid.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list, but the external clock source cannot be detected or become invalid. 1. Check whether the equipment that provides the external clock source is faulty. If... The equipment is faulty The equipment is normal 2. Then... Rectify the fault. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cable that connects the external clock source is normal. If... The cable is abnormal The cable is normal Then... Replace the cable. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.86 EXT_TIME_LOC
Description
The EXT_TIME_LOC is an alarm of the loss of the external time source.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The time of a local NE cannot be synchronized to the external time device to which the NE's enabled external time port is connected.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The link at a port is faulty. Cause 2: The external time device is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The link at a port is faulty. 1. Check cable connections. If cables are incorrectly connected, connect the cables again.

Step 2 Cause 2: The external time device is faulty. 1. Check whether the external time device is faulty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.87 FAN_AGING
Description
The FAN_AGING is an alarm of the aged fan. This alarm occurs when the fan rotates at a speed lower than eighty percent of the nominal speed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the number of the alarmed fan.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the temperature of the NE is too high and impacts the long-term operation of the NE.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The fan is aged.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The fan is aged. 1. Replace the fan.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.88 FAN_FAIL
Description
The FAN_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the fan is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

335

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the number of the fan.

Impact on the System


When the FAN_FAIL alarm occurs, the heat dissipation of the system is affected. After an alarm is reported, clear it immediately. Otherwise, services may be interrupted or equipment may be damaged. When a fan is faulty, perform the following operations: l l Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 96 hours if the ambient temperature ranges from 0C to 40C . Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 24 hours if the ambient temperature is higher than 40C .

When multiple fans are faulty, replace them immediately.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly. Cause 2: Fan failure occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly. 1. Remove the fan board. Clean the dust on the fan and reinsert the fan board. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is removed and inserted Step 2 Cause 2: Fan failure occurs. 1. Replace the alarmed fan board. Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.89 FCS_ERR
Description
The FCS_ERR is an alarm indicating the errors of frame check sequence (FCS). This alarm occurs when a board detects FCS errors in the received frames.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning The value is always 0x01. Indicate the VCTRUNK number where the alarm occurs.

Impact on the System


When the FCS_ERR alarm occurs, if the encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both ends of Ethernet services, the services may have errors and even become interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both ends of services. Cause 2: Service channels have errors. Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both ends of services. 1. Check whether the encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are consistent at both ends of services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The protocols are inconsistent The protocols are consistent 2.

Then... Correct the configuration data. Go to the next step.

Check whether the encapsulation parameters are consistent at both ends of services. If... The parameters are inconsistent The parameters are consistent Then... Correct the configuration data. Go to the next step.

Step 2 Cause 2: Service channels have errors. 1. Check whether any error alarm or performance event occurs on the line board that carries the services. If... Yes No Then... Handle the alarm or performance event. Go to the next step.

Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.90 FLOW_OVER
Description
The FLOW_OVER is an alarm indicating that the data flow received by the Ethernet port exceeds the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the receive or transmit direction in which traffic crosses the specified threshold. l 0x00: the receive direction l 0x01: the transmit direction

Impact on the System


When the FLOW_OVER alarm occurs, the extra data may be discarded by the port.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The traffic threshold of the local port is very low. Cause 2: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The traffic threshold of the local port is very low. 1. Increase the traffic threshold of the local port to a value that is lower than the rate of the local port. Configure the QoS policies at the opposite end to reduce the data flow that the opposite end transmits.

Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.91 HARD_BAD
Description
The HARD_BAD is an alarm indicating hardware errors.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 3 Meaning Indicate the internal faults detected by the board.

Impact on the System


The alarmed board fails to work. If the board is configured with the 1+1 protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. Cause 3: The slot is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board and backplane are connected improperly. 1. Remove and insert the alarmed board. For details, see 6.1 Removing a Board and 6.2 Inserting a Board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is removed and inserted The alarm persists after the board is removed and inserted Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6 Part Replacement. If... The alarm is cleared after the board is replaced The alarm persists after the board is replaced Step 3 Cause 3: The slot is faulty. 1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the faulty slot.
TIP

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Ensure that the board is normal.

Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Ensure that the slot is normal.

Generally, the slot becomes faulty due to the broken pin or bent pin. Remove the board, and use a torch to observe whether there is any broken pin or bent pin.

2.

If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot and add the board again. Then, the board can work normally.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.92 HP_CROSSTR
Description
The HP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the higher order path error crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the performance event that the higher order path error crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. l 0x30: HPBBE l 0x31: HPES l 0x32: HPSES l 0x33: HPFEBBE l 0x34: HPFEES l 0x35: HPFESES l 0x36: HPUAS l 0x37: HPCSES l 0x38: HPFECSES l 0x4c: HPFEUAS

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

341

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the HP_CROSSTR alarm occurs, a large number of errors occur in the service, and the service may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The higher order path error crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The higher order path error crosses the preset threshold. 1. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event that the higher order path error crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.

2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.93 HP_LOM
Description
The HP_LOM is an alarm indicating the loss of the higher order path multiframe. This alarm occurs when the board detects that byte H4 is inconsistent with the expected multiframe sequence.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the HP_LOM alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... Then...

The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. The alarm persists Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board on the opposite NE.

Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.94 HP_RDI
Description
The HP_RDI is an alarm indicating the higher order path remote receive failure. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 5 of byte G1 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the HP_RDI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service received by the opposite NE, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote receive failure.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote receive failure.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 343

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Clear the alarms such as HP_LOM and B3_EXC that the AU-4 path reports on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.95 HP_REI
Description
The HP_REI is an alarm indicating the higher order path remote error. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bits 1-4 of G1 take a value from 1 to 8.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The service on the local site is not affected. The service received by the opposite station, however, has errors.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote errors.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the higher order path remote receive failure. 1. Handle the HP_BBE performance event that the AU-4 path reports on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.96 HP_SLM
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The HP_SLM is an alarm indicating the lower order path label mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects the C2 byte mismatch.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The C2 byte received by the local NE does not match with the C2 byte transmitted by the remote NE. Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The C2 byte received by the local NE does not match with the C2 byte transmitted by the remote NE. 1. Configure the same service type at the source and sink of the AU-4 path. For details, see Configuring Overhead Bytes.

Step 2 Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect. 1. If the alarmed port is the SDH port that is interconnected with the ATM/Ethernet equipment, configure the service as VC-4 pass-through service. For details, see Creating CrossConnections of SNCP Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.97 HP_TIM
Description
The HP_TIM is an alarm indicating the higher order path trace identifier mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects the J1 byte mismatch.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


If the service is configured with the protection that considers the HP_TIM alarm as a trigger condition, the protection switching is triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The receivable J1 byte on the local NE does not match with the J1 byte transmitted on the opposite NE. Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receivable J1 byte on the local NE does not match with the J1 byte transmitted on the opposite NE. 1. Disable the receivable J1 byte on the local NE or set the receivable J1 byte on the local NE to the same as the transmitted J1 byte on the opposite NE. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs.

Step 2 Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect. 1. If the alarmed port is the SDH port that is interconnected with the ATM/Ethernet equipment, configure the service as VC-4 pass-through service. For details, see Creating CrossConnections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services. If... Then...

The alarm is cleared after the configuration The fault is rectified. End the alarm is changed handling. The alarm persists after the configuration is changed 2. Go to the next step.

Check whether the cross-connections are configured correctly at the intermediate nodes where the service travels. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.98 HP_UNEQ
Description
The HP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating the unequipped higher order path. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the C2 byte is 0.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the HP_UNEQ alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is unavailable. If the service is configured with the protection that considers the alarm as a trigger condition, the protection switching is triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The line port at the local NE is configured with services, but the corresponding line port at the opposite NE is not configured with services. Cause 2: Byte C2 is set to 0 at the opposite NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line port at the local NE is configured with services, but the corresponding line port at the opposite NE is not configured with services. 1. Configure line services on the opposite NE. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services.

Step 2 Cause 2: Byte C2 is set to 0 at the opposite NE. 1. Change the setting of byte C2. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.99 HPAD_CROSSTR
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The HPAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the higher order path adaptation performance crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. l 0xaa: TUPJCHIGH l 0xab: TUPJCLOW l 0xac: TUPJCNEW

Impact on the System


When the HPAD_CROSSTR alarm occurs, bit errors may occur in the service.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold. 1. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event of TU pointer justification that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.

2.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.100 IF_CABLE_OPEN
Description
The IF_CABLE_OPEN is an alarm indicating that the IF cable is open.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the IF_CABLE_OPEN alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed IF port is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty. Cause 2: The IF port on the IF board is damaged. Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty. 1. Check whether the connector of the IF cable is loose or whether the connector is made properly. The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF board, the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable, and the connector between the IF cable and the ODU. If... The connector is loose Then... Connect the connector tightly.

The connector is made improperly See the Installation Reference and make new connectors for the IF cable. None of the above 2. Go to the next step.

Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged. If... The cable does not meet the requirement The cable meets the requirement Then... Replace the cable with a qualified one. Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.
349

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The IF port on the IF board is damaged. 1. 1. Replace the alarmed IF board. Replace the ODU connected to the alarmed IF board. Step 3 Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty.

----End

Related Information
NOTE

When rectifying the faults of the IF cable, IF port, and ODU, you must turn off the ODU before the operation. You can turn on the ODU only after the operation is complete.

A.3.101 IF_INPWR_ABN
Description
The IF_INPWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the power supplied by an IF board to an ODU is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning l 0x01: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is too high. l 0x02: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is too low.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services on the ODU are interrupted. If 1+1 protection is configured, this alarm also triggers 1+1 HSB switching.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The IF board is faulty. Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 350

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 3: The ODU is faulty. Cause 4: The IF fiber jumper and the IF board are connected incorrectly.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IF board is faulty. 1. Replace the IF board connected to the alarmed ODU.

Step 2 Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty. 1. Check whether the connectors of the IF cable are loose or prepared incorrectly. The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF board, the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable, and the connector between the IF cable and the ODU. If... Any of the connectors is loose Any of the connectors is prepared incorrectly All connectors are normal Then... Connect the connector tightly. See the Installation Reference and make new connectors for the IF cable. Go to the next step.

2.

Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged or deformed, and test the connectivity between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable. For details, see Testing the Connectivity of the IF Cable. If... The IF cable is below standard The IF cable is up to standard Then... Replace the IF cable. The IF board or ODU may be faulty.

Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed ODU.

Step 4 Cause 4: The IF fiber jumper and the IF board are connected incorrectly. 1. Connect the IF fiber jumper and the IF board correctly.

----End

Related Information
The logical slot ID of the ODU is obtained by adding 20 to the slot ID of the IF board connected to the ODU.

A.3.102 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 351

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED is an alarm indicating that the configured IF working mode is not supported. This alarm occurs if the board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the FPGA file that is loaded to the board. l 0x01 indicates that FPGA file 250 is loaded. l 0x02 indicates that FPGA file 002 is loaded.

Impact on the System


When the IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed IF port is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode, or the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode is damaged.

Procedure
l Cause 1: The board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode, or the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode is damaged. 1. ----End Contact Huawei engineers to upgrade the software and the FPGA file.

Related Information
None.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

352

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.103 IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN
Description
The IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the IMA group at the local end fails. This alarm occurs when the IMA group is in non-Active state on the local NE or when the activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, all links of the alarmed IMA group are unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The IMA links on the local NE are faulty. Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IMA links on the local NE are faulty. 1. 2. Check whether the T_ALOS alarm is reported at the E1 port. If yes, clear this alarm. Check whether the IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, configure the related services at other ports or replace the related board.

Step 2 Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number. If... Then...

The ALM_IMA_LIF alarm occurs Clear the ALM_IMA_LIF alarm immediately. Activate the links of the IMA group on the local NE. No other alarm occurs Reconfigure the links of the IMA group on the local NE.

When the number of activated links of the IMA group reaches the minimum number, the alarm clears automatically. ----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 353

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.104 IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN
Description
The IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the IMA group at the remote end fails. This alarm occurs when the IMA group is in non-Active state on the remote NE or when the activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the ports of the IMA group are congested and services have bit errors.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The IMA links on the remote NE are faulty. Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IMA links on the remote NE are faulty. 1. 2. Check whether the T_ALOS alarm is reported at the E1 port. If yes, clear this alarm. Check whether the IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, configure the related services at other ports or replace the related board.

Step 2 Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number. If... Then...

The ALM_IMA_LIF alarm occurs Clear the ALM_IMA_LIF alarm immediately. Activate the links of the IMA group on the opposite NE. No other alarm occurs Reconfigure the links of the IMA group on the remote NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

354

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

When the number of activated links of the IMA group reaches the minimum number, the alarm clears automatically. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.105 IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH
Description
The IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH alarm may cause loss of ATM cells.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends. 1. 2. Check the alarm information and determine the NE, board, and ATM trunk related to the alarm. Modify the Clock Mode parameter of the alarmed ATM trunk to the same value as that of the opposite end. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
The Clock Mode parameter can be set to two modes. l CTC mode: Common transmit clock mode. In CTC mode, all transmit clocks of the links in an IMA group are from the same clock source.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

ITC mode: Independent transmit clock mode. In ITC mode, the transmit clocks of the links in an IMA group are from different clock sources. When the IMA group is set to the line clock mode, the ITC mode is recommended.

A.3.106 IN_PWR_ABN
Description
The IN_PWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is abnormal.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the IN_PWR_ABN alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors and even becomes unavailable.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high or over low. Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high or over low. 1. Browse current performance events, and query the performance event of the transmit optical power on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The transmit optical power does not meet Replace the optical module. the requirement The transmit optical power is over high Add a proper attenuator to reduce the receive optical power.

Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. 1. Query the board manufacturing information report, and check whether the models of the SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 356

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The models are incorrect The models are correct

Then... Replace the optical module. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. 1. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power, and check whether the receive optical power meets the requirement. If yes, contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.

Step 4 Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades. If... Then...

The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean fiber connectors. The connector or fiber is damaged ----End Insert the connector properly or replace the damaged fiber jumper.

Related Information
The following table describes the meanings of the parameters in the IN_PWR_ABN alarm reported by the EMS6. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning Indicates the port number. The value of Parameter 2 is always 0x00, and the value of Parameter 3 is always 0x01. The two parameters indicate the path ID. Reserved. The values are always 0xFF.

Parameter 4, Parameter 5

A.3.107 IN_PWR_HIGH
Description
The IN_PWR_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is over high.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 357

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high. Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite site is over high. 1. Browse current performance events, and query the performance event of the transmit optical power on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The transmit optical power does not meet Contact Huawei engineers to replace the the requirement optical module. The transmit optical power meets the requirement Add a proper attenuator to reduce the receive optical power.

Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. 1. Query the board manufacturing information report, and check whether the models of the SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct. If... The models are incorrect The models are correct Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. 1. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power, and check whether the receive optical power meets the requirement. If yes, contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.

----End

Related Information
The optical power threshold set for the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm is lower than the overload point. SDH Interface Performance.

A.3.108 IN_PWR_LOW
Description
The IN_PWR_LOW is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is over low.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 358

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the IN_PWR_LOW alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over low. Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over low. 1. Browse current performance events, and query the performance event of the transmit optical power on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The transmit optical power does not meet Contact Huawei engineers to replace the the requirement optical module. The transmit optical power meets the requirement Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect. 1. Query the board manufacturing information report, and check whether the models of the SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct. If... The models are incorrect The models are correct Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty. 1. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power, and check whether the receive optical power meets the requirement. If... The receive optical power meets the requirement
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.


359

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If...

Then...

The receive optical power does not meet the Go to Cause 4. requirement Step 4 Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades. 1. If... The alarm is cleared after the connector is cleaned The alarm persists after the connector is cleaned ----End Clean fiber connectors and adapters. Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the fiber.

Related Information
The optical power threshold set for the IN_PWR_LOW alarm is higher than the sensitivity point. SDH Interface Performance.

A.3.109 INTEMP_SENSOR_FAIL
Description
The INTEMP_SENSOR_FAILL is an alarm indicating that the air inlet temperature sensor of the cabinet fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The air inlet temperature data of the TCU cannot be collected.

Possible Causes
l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The air inlet temperature sensor is faulty. Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. Cause 4: The air inlet temperature sensor is not installed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 360

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The air inlet temperature sensor is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the air inlet temperature sensor. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The control board of the cabinet is faulty. 1. 2. Replace the cabinet. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Cables are misconnected or damaged. 1. 2. Replace damaged cables. Connect cables correctly.

Step 4 Cause 4: The air inlet temperature sensor is not installed. 1. Install the air inlet temperature sensor.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.110 J0_MM
Description
The J0_MM is an alarm indicating the trace identifier mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects the J0 byte mismatch.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 361

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The receivable J0 byte on the local NE does not match the transmitted J0 byte on the opposite NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receivable J0 byte on the local NE does not match the transmitted J0 byte on the opposite NE. 1. Disable the receivable J0 byte on the local NE. For details, see Configuring RSOHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.111 K1_K2_M
Description
The K1_K2_M is an alarm indicating the K1/K2 byte mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects inconsistent channel numbers that the transmitted K1 byte (bits 5-8) and the received K2 byte (bits 1-4) indicate.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning l 0x01: linear MS protection. l 0x02: ring MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 362

Parameter 1 Indicates the protection group type.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When the K1_K2_M alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switching may fail.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The switching modes configured at both ends are single-ended switching and dualended switching separately. Cause 2: The fiber connection is incorrect. Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The switching modes configured at both ends are single-ended switching and dualended switching separately. 1. Check whether the switching modes at both ends are the same. If... The switching modes are different The switching modes are the same Step 2 Cause 2: The fiber connection is incorrect. 1. Check whether the fiber connection is correct. For example, the fiber at the receive or transmit port may be incorrectly connected, or disconnected. If... The fiber connection is incorrect The connection is correct Step 3 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board. Then... Connect the fiber properly. Go to Cause 3. Then... Configure the switching modes as the same. Go to Cause 2.

Related Information
None.

A.3.112 K2_M
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 363

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The K2_M is an alarm indicating the K2 byte mismatch. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the protection mode indicated by the received K2 (bit 5) is different from the protection mode of the NE.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning l 0x01: linear MS protection. l 0x02: ring MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Parameter 1 Indicates the protection group type.

Impact on the System


When the K2_M alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switching may fail.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1+1 or 1:N). Cause 2: The MSP protocol is stopped when the protection switching occurs. Cause 3: The fiber connection is incorrect. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1 +1 or 1:N). 1. Query the status of the linear MSP, and check whether two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1+1 or 1:N).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 364

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The protection modes are different The protection modes are the same

Then... Configure the protection modes as the same. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The MSP protocol is stopped when the protection switching occurs. 1. Query the status of the linear MSP, and check whether the MSP protocol is stopped on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The protocol is stopped Restart the MSP protocol on the opposite NE. For details, see Starting/Stopping the Linear MSP Protocol. The protocol is running Go to Cause 3. Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connection is incorrect. 1. Check whether the fiber connection is correct. For example, the fiber at the receive or transmit port may be incorrectly connected, or disconnected. If... The connection is incorrect The connection is correct Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board. Then... Connect the fiber properly Go to Cause 4.

Related Information
None.

A.3.113 LAG_BWMM
Description
LAG_BWMM is an alarm indicating the bandwidth inconsistency in the LAG group.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

365

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


For a LAG group in load-sharing mode, data services may be lost.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: In the LAG group, the license capacities of the ports differ from each other.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: In the LAG group, the license capacities of the ports differ from each other. 1. 2. Query the license capacities of the ports of the LAG group by using the NMS. If the license capacities of the ports differ from each other, reload a license file of an appropriate capacity.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.114 LAG_DOWN
Description
The LAG_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable. This alarm occurs when the LAG does not have activated members.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LAG_DOWN alarm occurs, the service at the member port of the LAG is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: All the member ports of the aggregation group are invalid for the same causes as the LAG_MEMBER_DOWN alarm.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 366

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: All the member ports of the LAG are invalid for the same causes as the LAG_MEMBER_DOWN alarm. 1. 2. Determine the alarmed port according to the alarm parameter. Rectify the fault at each member port according to the description of LAG_MEMBER_DOWN.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.115 LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
Description
The LAG_MEMBER_DOWN is an alarm indicating that a member port of a link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable. This alarm occurs when a member port of an LAG can neither be activated nor function as a protection port.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the slot ID of the alarmed board. Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the alarmed subboard. The value is always 0xff.

Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port. Parameter 6 Indicates the cause that makes the port unavailable. l 0x01: The port link is faulty or disabled. l 0x02: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. l 0x03: The port works in half-duplex mode. l 0x04: The port is self-looped.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 367

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The port in the LAG cannot share the service load, and the port does not transmit or receive any services.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The port link is faulty or disabled. Cause 2: The port receives no LACP packets. Cause 3: The port works in half-duplex mode or not in Auto-Negotiation mode. Cause 4: The port is self-looped.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the alarmed port and the cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 Then... Perform the operations described in step Step 2. Perform the operations described in step Step 3. Perform the operations described in step Step 4. Perform the operations described in step Step 5.

Step 2 Cause 1: The port link is faulty or disabled. 1. On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG is enabled. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If... The port is not enabled The port is enabled 2. Then... Enable the port in the LAG. Go to the next step.

Check the link status of all ports and check whether the ETH_LOS alarm is reported. If... The alarm is reported Then... Clear the ETH_LOS alarm immediately and rectify the fault of the port link.

The alarm is not reported Go to Cause 2. Step 3 Cause 2: The port receives no LACP packets. 1. Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If the LACP packets are not transmitted, configure the ports at two ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted.

Step 4 Cause 3: The port works in half-duplex mode or not in Auto-Negotiation mode. 1. On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG works in half-duplex mode. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If the port works in half-duplex mode, change the working mode of the port into full-duplex. On the NMS, change the working mode of the port into full-duplex and Auto-Negotiation.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 368

2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 5 Cause 4: The port is self-looped. 1. Check whether the port is self-looped. For details, see 8.15 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port. If the port is self-looped, release the selfloop. For details, see 8.5.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.116 LAG_PORT_FAIL
Description
The LAG_PORT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that a port in the LAG fails. When a port in the LAG is unavailable, the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Meaning Indicates the number of the IP port. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Indicates the cause of the protection failure. l 0x01: The link of the port is faulty or fails. l 0x02: The port is in half-duplex mode. l 0x03: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. l 0x04: The port detects the selfloop. l 0x05: Other unknown reasons. Parameter 5 The value is always 0xff.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

369

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The port in the LAG cannot share the service load, and the port does not transmit or receive any services.

Possible Causes
l l l l l Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode. Cause 3: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. Cause 4: The port detects a selfloop. Cause 5: other unknown reasons

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the port where the alarm occurs and the alarm cause according to the alarm parameter. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x05 Step 2 Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. 1. On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG is enabled. For details, see Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports. If... Then... Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2. Go to Cause 3. Go to Cause 4. Go to Cause 5.

The port is not enabled Enable the port in the LAG group. The port is enabled Check the link state of each port. If any link is faulty, rectify the fault.

Step 3 Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode. 1. On the NMS, check the working mode of the port in the LAG group. If the port is in halfduplex mode, change the working mode of the port into full-duplex. For details, see Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.

Step 4 Cause 3: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. 1. On the NMS, check whether the LAG group is properly configured on the opposite end. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If... The LAG group is not properly configured The LAG group is properly configured
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Then... Reconfigure the LAG group. Go to the next step.


370

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

2.

Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. If the LACP packets are not transmitted, configure the ports at both ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. Release the selfloop of the port with reference to Enabling Self-Loop Detection. Contact Huawei engineers.

Step 5 Cause 4: The port detects a selfloop. 1. 1. Step 6 Cause 5: other unknown reasons ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.117 LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL
Description
The LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that a VCG port in the LAG fails. When the VCTRUNK is unavailable, the alarm is reported.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the number of the faulty VCG port in the LAG. Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

371

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 4

Meaning Indicates the cause of the protection failure. l 0x01: The link of the port is faulty or fails. l 0x03: The port fails to receive the LACP packets. l 0x04: The link of the port is configured into a loop. l 0x05: other unknown reasons.

Parameter 5

The value is always 0xff.

Impact on the System


The port in the LAG cannot share the service load, and the port does not transmit or receive any services.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The link of the port is faulty or fails. Cause 2: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. Cause 3: The port detects a selfloop. Cause 4: other unknown reasons

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the port where the alarm occurs and the alarm cause according to the alarm parameter. If... The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 The value of Parameter 4 is 0x05 Step 2 Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty. 1. 1. Check the link state of each VCG port. If any link is faulty, rectify the fault. On the NMS, check whether the LAG group is properly configured on the opposite end. If... The LAG group is not properly configured The LAG group is properly configured 2. Then... Reconfigure the LAG group. Go to the next step. Step 3 Cause 2: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets. Then... Go to Cause 1. Go to Cause 2. Go to Cause 3. Go to Cause 4.

Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. If the LACP packets are not transmitted, configure the ports at both ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted.

Step 4 Cause 3: The port detects a selfloop.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 372

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1.

Release the selfloop of the port.

Step 5 Cause 4: other unknown reasons 1. Contact Huawei engineers.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.118 LAN_LOC
Description
The LAN_LOC is an alarm indicating the Ethernet communication failure.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the network port ID. For example, 0x01 indicates network port 1 and 0x02 indicates network port 2.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the number of the path on which the alarm is reported. Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and the value is always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits and the value is always 0x01.

Impact on the System


When the alarm is reported, the communication of the network port is interrupted. As a result, the NE is out of control. The existing services of the NE, however, are not affected.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The cable is not connected to the network port, or the cable is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 373

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 2: The network port is faulty. Cause 3: The system control, switching, and timing board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 View the alarm on the NMS. Determine the network port ID according to the alarm parameter 1. Step 2 Cause 1: The cable is not connected to the network port, or the cable is faulty. 1. Check whether the cable of the network port is loose or no cable is connected. Properly connect the NMS to the network port. The LINK indicator is in green.

Step 3 Cause 2: The network port is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty board. For details, see 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

Step 4 Cause 3: The system control, switching, and timing board is faulty. 1. Replace the system control, switching, and timing board. For details, see 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.119 LASER_CLOSED
Description
The LASER_CLOSED is an alarm indicating that the laser is shut down. This alarm occurs when the laser is shut down by using the NMS.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LASER_CLOSED alarm occurs, the optical interface fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 374

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS. 1. Find out the cause of shutting down the laser and start up the laser as soon as possible.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.120 LASER_MOD_ERR
Description
The LASER_MOD_ERR is an alarm indicating that the type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LASER_MOD_ERR alarm occurs, the performance of the optical interface degrades and serious degradation even causes service interruption.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. Cause 2: The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module does not match the interface type. Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. 1. Check whether the optical module installed at the optical interface matches the rate of the optical interface. For details, see 8.4.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report .
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 375

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The optical module does not match the rate of the optical interface The optical module matches the rate of the optical interface

Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module with one that matches the rate of the optical interface. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The SFP module does not match the interface type. 1. Replace the existing SFP module with a proper SFP module.

Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty optical module. If... The alarm is cleared after the optical module is replaced The alarm persists after the optical module is replaced Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.121 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX
Description
The LASER_MOD_ERR is an alarm indicating that the type of the pluggable optical module on the board does not match the type of the optical interface.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LASER_MOD_ERR_EX alarm occurs, the performance of the optical interface degrades and serious degradation even causes service interruption.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 376

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. Cause 2: The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module does not match the interface type. Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the optical interface. 1. Check whether the optical module installed at the optical interface matches the rate of the optical interface. For details, see 8.4.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report . If... The optical module does not match the rate of the optical interface The optical module matches the rate of the optical interface Then... Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module with one that matches the rate of the optical interface. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The SFP module does not match the interface type. 1. Replace the existing SFP module with a proper SFP module. Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty optical module. If... The alarm is cleared after the optical module is replaced The alarm persists after the optical module is replaced Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.122 LASER_SHUT
Description
The LASER_SHUT is an alarm indicating that the laser is shut down. This alarm occurs when the laser is shut down by using the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 377

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the laser_shut alarm occurs, the optical interface fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS. 1. Find out the cause of shutting down the laser and start up the laser as soon as possible.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.123 LCAS_FOPR
Description
The LCAS_FOPR is an alarm indicating that the LCAS protocol in the receive direction fails. This alarm occurs if the receive unit of the LCAS module of a board detects an abnormal state in which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot negotiate correctly.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 378

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


The Ethernet service is not normal.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. Cause 2: The link is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. 1. Check whether the LCAS enabling state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both ends of the link. If... The settings of the LCAS protocols are not consistent The settings of the LCAS protocols at both ends are consistent 2. Then... Properly enable the LCAS protocols at both ends. Go to Cause 2.

Check whether configurations of the local and opposite NEs are correct. For example, check whether a VCG on one NE is connected to multiple VCGs on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Correct the configuration data. incorrect The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Go to Cause 2. correct Step 2 Cause 2: The link is faulty. 1. Check whether the link where the service travels has errors or becomes faulty. If... The link is faulty The link is normal 2. Then... Rectify the fault. Go to the next step.

Restart the LCAS protocols at both ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears Then... End the alarm handling.
379

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The alarm persists ----End

Then... Replace the alarmed board.

Related Information
None.

A.3.124 LCAS_FOPT
Description
The LCAS_FOPT is an alarm indicating that the LCAS protocol in the transmit direction fails. This alarm occurs if the transmit unit of the LCAS module of a board detects an abnormal state in which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot negotiate correctly.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


The Ethernet service is not normal.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. Cause 2: The link is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 380

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect. 1. Check whether the LCAS enabling state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both ends of the link. If... The settings of the LCAS protocols are not consistent Then... Properly enable the LCAS protocols at both ends.

The settings of the LCAS protocol at both Go to Cause 2. ends are consistent 2. Check whether configurations of the local and opposite NEs are correct. For example, check whether a VCG on one NE is connected to multiple VCGs on the opposite NE. If... Then...

The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Correct the configuration data. incorrect The configurations of the local and opposite NEs are Go to Cause 2. correct Step 2 Cause 2: The link is faulty. 1. Check whether the link where the service travels has errors or becomes faulty. If... The link is faulty The link is normal 2. Then... Rectify the fault. Go to the next step.

Restart the LCAS protocols at both ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.125 LCAS_PLCR
Description
The LCAS_PLCR is an alarm indicating that a part of the LCAS bandwidth in the receive direction is lost. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the number of paths that carry the overloads in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS function enabled is less than the preset number but is not zero.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 381

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


The available Ethernet service bandwidth is smaller than the configured bandwidth.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 1. Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local site are configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots. If... Then...

The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. For details, bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or bound with different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth. If yes Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. 1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote site.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 382

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs

Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.126 LCAS_PLCT
Description
The LCAS_PLCT is an alarm indicating that part of the LCAS bandwidth in the transmit direction is lost. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the number of paths that carry the overloads in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS function enabled is less than the preset number but is not zero.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUN 1.

Impact on the System


The available transmit bandwidth of Ethernet services is less than the preset bandwidth. When the transmitted services are more than the available transmit bandwidth, packet loss occurs.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 383

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 1. Check whether the sink and source VCTRUNKs are bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots. If... Then...

The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. For details, bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth. The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Go to Cause 2. bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. 1. Check whether any path alarm exists in the receive direction of the remote site. If... Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to the next step.

Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.127 LCAS_TLCR
Description
The LCAS_TLCR is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the receive direction is lost. This alarm occurs when no path in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with LCAS enabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

384

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUN 1.

Impact on the System


There is no available bandwidth in the receive direction, and the Ethernet services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 1. Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local site are configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots. If... Then...

The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. For details, bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or bound with different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth. The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Go to Cause 2. bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty. 1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote site.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 385

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs

Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to Cause 3.

Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.128 LCAS_TLCT
Description
The LCAS_TLCT is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the transmit direction is lost. This alarm occurs when no path in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with LCAS enabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.

Impact on the System


There is no available bandwidth in the transmit direction, and the Ethernet services are interrupted.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 386

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remote site is different from that at the local site. 1. Check whether the sink and source VCTRUNKs are bound with the same number of physical paths or the same timeslots. If... Then...

The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Correct the configuration data. For details, bound with different number of physical see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the paths or bound with different timeslots VCTRUNK Bandwidth. The sink and source VCTRUNKs are Go to Cause 2. bound with the same number of physical paths or bound with the same timeslots Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty. 1. Check whether any path alarm exists in the receive direction of the remote site. If... Any of the preceding alarms occurs No alarm occurs Then... Clear the alarm immediately. Go to the next step.

Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.129 LCD
Description
The LCD is an alarm indicating loss of cell delimitation. This alarm occurs when the OCD alarm continuously occurs within the transmission period of N cells. The letter "N" indicates the LCD alarm threshold value. For different ports, the threshold value is different.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

387

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


l When the LCD alarm occurs, all the services in the receive direction of the port are interrupted and all the connections at the port insert segment or end AIS cells to the downstream.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The path connected to the ATM port receives signals in an incorrect manner. For example, the MS_AIS, AU_AIS or AU_LOP alarm occurs. Cause 2: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC. Cause 3: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path connected to the ATM port receives signals in an incorrect manner. For example, the MS_AIS, AU_AIS or AU_LOP alarm occurs. 1. 2. Check whether the MS_AIS, AU_AIS, or AU_LOP alarm occurs in the path connected to the ATM port. If yes, clear these alarms first, and then check whether the LCD alarm is cleared.

Step 2 Cause 2: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC. 1. 2. 1. 2. Check whether the B1_EXC, B2_EXC, or B3_EXC alarm occurs in the receive path. If yes, clear these alarms first, and then check whether the LCD alarm is cleared. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the LCD alarm. For details, see 8.6.1 Cold Reset. If the LCD alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.

Step 3 Cause 3: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.

----End

Related Information
End and segment The end point, used to monitor the entire virtual connection, is set at the end of the chain network. The segment point is used to monitor a segment of the entire link.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 388

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Thresholds of generating the LCD alarm at different ports l l l For the external ATM port, the threshold of generating the LCD alarm is seven cells. For a VC-4 VCTRUNK port, the threshold of generating the LCD alarm is 360 cells. For a VC-12 VCTRUNK port, the threshold of generating the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm in the bound E1 link is 104 cells. If only one E1 link is bound with the VCTRUNK, the LCD alarm is reported when the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm occurs. If the VCTRUNK is bound with multiple E1 links in the IMA group, and if the number of E1 links in which the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm occurs is greater than the value derived from the total number of bound E1 links subtracted by the minimum number of activated links in the receive direction of the IMA group, the LCD alarm is reported at the VCTRUNK port. Otherwise, the LCD alarm is not reported.

A.3.130 LCS_LIMITED
Description
The LCS_LIMITED alarm indicates that the configuration capacity of an NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

389

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the alarm cause. l 0x01: The E1 service capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x02: The AM license file is not loaded. l 0x03: For IF protection, the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file. l 0x04: The 1588v2 capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x05: The ATM/IMA capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x06: The air port LAG capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x07: The E1 priority capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x08: The synchronous Ethernet capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x09: The air port compression capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file l 0x10: The MPLS service license capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x11: The PLA license capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. l 0x12: The total service bandwidth (TDM service bandwidth and data service bandwidth) exceeds the bandwidth allowed by the Ethernet license file for the working and protection links.

Impact on the System


When the LCS_LIMITED alarm occurs, the change of radio service capacity cannot take effect on the NE.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The AM configuration on the NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. Cause 2: For IF protection, the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file. Cause 3: The services configured on the NE exceed the capacity authorized by the license file.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the capacity of the license by using the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 390

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 1: The AM configuration on the NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. 1. Check the AM enabling status. If the license does not allow the AM to be enabled, set the AM function to disabled.

Step 3 Cause 2: For IF protection, the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file. 1. Check whether the capacities that are authorized by the license files for the main and standby IF boards in an IF protection group are consistent with the capacities specified in the contract. If not, contact Huawei technical support engineers to reload correct license files.

Step 4 Cause 3: The services configured on the NE exceed the capacity authorized by the license file. 1. when the alarm parameter is 0x01, check whether the radio service configuration exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file. For details, see Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes. If yes, reduce the number of E1 services. Purchase and load the corresponding service license.

2.

----End

Related Information
For TDM services, radio service capacities of NEs are calculated based on the service crossconnections on IF boards.

A.3.131 LFA
Description
The LFA is an alarm indicating that the E1 frame alignment at the local end of the inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) link in the receive direction is lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the path ID.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 391

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


l l l When this alarm occurs, the alarmed E1 link is unavailable, and the available links in the IMA group are reduced. If the VCTRUNK link binds only one member, the service is interrupted when the LFA alarm occurs. After this alarm clears, the E1 link in the IMA group will be recovered automatically.

Possible Causes
The possible causes of the LFA alarm are as follows: l Cause 1: The demultiplexing module of the E1 frame cannot perform the frame alignment function, and therefore the frame alignment loss alarms are reported. These alarms include TU_LOP, TU_AIS, and alarm indicating that the cross-connection is not configured. Cause 2: The alarmed board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Check for the TU_LOP and TU_AIS alarms on the NMS. If these alarms occur, handle these alarms first. Step 2 Cause 2: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. 2. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the board. If the alarm occurs, perform a cold reset on the board that reports the hardware failure alarm, and check whether the alarm clears.

CAUTION
If the service on the board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes service interruptions. 3. If the alarm persists, replace the board. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board or 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.

----End

Related Information
Basic frame As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS) or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).

A.3.132 LICENSE_DIFF
Description
The LICENSE_DIFF is an alarm indicating that the license file on the IF board is different from the backup file on the system control board. After the IF board or system control board is
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 392

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

replaced, the license file on the IF board may be different from the backup file on the system control board.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the license file. l 0x01: AM license. l 0x02: Hybrid license. l 0x03: TDM license.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

393

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 2 Indicates the capacity of the license file on the IF board. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x01: l 0x01: The AM function is disabled. l 0x02: The AM function is enabled. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x02: l 0x01: The hybrid capacity is 10 Mbit/s. l 0x02: The hybrid capacity is 20 Mbit/s. l 0x03: The hybrid capacity is 50 Mbit/s. l 0x04: The hybrid capacity is 100 Mbit/s. l 0x05: The hybrid capacity is 150 Mbit/s. l 0x06: The hybrid capacity is 200 Mbit/s. l 0x07: The hybrid capacity is 300 Mbit/s. l 0x08: The hybrid capacity is 400 Mbit/s. l 0x09: The hybrid capacity is beyond the control of licenses. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x03: l 0x01: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 8xE1. l 0x02: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 16xE1. l 0x03: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 32xE1. l 0x04: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 48xE1. l 0x05: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 64xE1. l 0x06: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 128xE1. l 0x07: The TDM radio transmission capacity is beyond the control of licenses.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

394

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 3 Indicates the capacity of the license file on the system control board. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x01: l 0x01: The AM function is disabled. l 0x02: The AM function is enabled. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x02: l 0x01: The hybrid capacity is 10 Mbit/s. l 0x02: The hybrid capacity is 20 Mbit/s. l 0x03: The hybrid capacity is 50 Mbit/s. l 0x04: The hybrid capacity is 100 Mbit/s. l 0x05: The hybrid capacity is 150 Mbit/s. l 0x06: The hybrid capacity is 200 Mbit/s. l 0x07: The hybrid capacity is 300 Mbit/s. l 0x08: The hybrid capacity is 400 Mbit/s. l 0x09: The hybrid capacity is beyond the control of licenses. When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x03: l 0x01: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 8xE1. l 0x02: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 16xE1. l 0x03: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 32xE1. l 0x04: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 48xE1. l 0x05: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 64xE1. l 0x06: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 128xE1. l 0x07: The TDM radio transmission capacity is beyond the control of licenses.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: After the IF board or system control board is replaced, the license file on the IF board may be different from the backup file on the system control board.

Procedure
Step 1 This alarm only warns the user of the different license capacities on the IF board and the system control board. No handling is required. Software patrol is performed automatically 48 hours later and synchronizes the license capacities. Then, the alarm clears. ----End

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

395

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.133 LICENSE_LOST
Description
The LICENSE_LOST is an alarm indicating that the NE fails to detect the license file.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of the license file. l 0x02: Hybrid license l 0x03: TDM license l 0x04: 1588V2 license l 0x05: ATM/IMA license l 0x06: NE license

Impact on the System


When the LICENSE_LOST alarm occurs, the functions authorized by the license file cannot take effect.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The license file is lost or is not loaded.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The license file is lost or is not loaded. 1. Contact Huawei engineers to reload the license file to the NE.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 396

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.134 LINK_ERR
Description
The LINK_ERR alarm indicates that a data link is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical port. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by optical port 1.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported by path 1.

Impact on the System


Services in the alarmed path are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty. Cause 2: The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different. Cause 3: The equipment at the local or opposite end is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty. 1. Check whether the optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty. If... The optical fiber is faulty The optical fiber is not faulty
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Then... Replace the fiber. Go to Cause 2.


397

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 2 Cause 2: The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different. 1. Check whether the working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different. If... The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are the same Then... Set the working modes of the ports to the same. Go to the next step.

Step 3 Cause 3: The equipment at the local or opposite end is faulty. 1. Use an optical fiber to perform a loopback at the the alarmed port. For details, see 8.1 Hardware Loopback. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists ----End Then... Replace the Ethernet board at the opposite end. Replace the Ethernet board at the local end.

Related Information
None.

A.3.135 LMFA
Description
The LMFA is an alarm indicating the E1 multiframe alignment is lost when the E1 frame is a CRC-4 multiframe.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the path ID.


Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 398

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the alarmed E1 links become unavailable. As a result, fewer links of the IMA group are available. If the IMA group is comprised of only one link, services will be interrupted.

Possible Causes
The possible cause of the LMFA alarm is as follows: l l Cause 1: The alarmed board is faulty. Cause 2: The frame format is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The alarmed board is faulty. 1. 2. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the board. If the alarm occurs, perform a cold reset on the board that reports the hardware failure alarm, and check whether the alarm clears.

CAUTION
If the service on the board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes service interruptions. 3. 1. 2. If the alarm persists, replace the board. Check the frame format of the opposite port. For details, see Setting Advanced Attributes of Smart E1 Ports. Set the frame format to CRC-4 Multiframe if it is incorrect.

Step 2 Cause 2: The frame format is incorrect.

----End

Related Information
Basic frame As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS) or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS). Multiframe A multiframe is composed of sixteen PCM frames, and can implement cyclic redundancy check (CRC).

A.3.136 LOOP_ALM
Description
The LOOP_ALM is an alarm indicating that a loop occurs.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 399

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the type of loopback. l 0x00: optical/electrical port inloop. l 0x01: optical/electrical port outloop. l 0x02: path inloop. l 0x03: path outloop. l 0x04: loopback on the user side. l 0x05: loopback on the multiplexing side. l 0x08: ATM layer inloop. l 0x09: ATM layer outloop. l 0x0A: PHY layer inloop. l 0x0B: PHY layer outloop. l 0x0C: MAC layer inloop. l 0x0D: MAC layer outloop. l 0x0E: VC-4 timeslot inloop. l 0x0F: VC-4 timeslot outloop. l 0x10: VC-3 timeslot inloop. l 0x11: VC-3 timeslot outloop. l 0x12: VC-12 timeslot inloop. l 0x13: VC-12 timeslot outloop. l 0x14: IF outloop. l 0x15: IF inloop. l 0x16: RF inloop. l 0xFF: any of the preceding loopback modes.

Impact on the System


When the LOOP_ALM alarm occurs, the looped port or path cannot carry services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 400

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause 1: A loop is performed on the local NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A loop is performed on the local NE. 1. 2. Determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameter. Find out the cause of the loopback, and set the loopback status of the alarmed port to NonLoopback. For details, see 8.5 Software Loopback. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.137 LP_CROSSTR
Description
The LP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the lower order path error crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the performance event that the lower order path error crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

401

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 2, Parameter 3

Meaning Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. l 0x90: LPBBE l 0x91: LPES l 0x92: LPSES l 0x93: LPFEBBE l 0x94: LPFEES l 0x95: LPFESES l 0x96: LPUAS l 0x8e: LPFEUAS l 0x97: LPCSES l 0x98: LPFECSES

Impact on the System


When the LP_CROSSTR alarm occurs, a large number of errors occur in the service, and the service may even be interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The lower order path error crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The lower order path error crosses the preset threshold. 1. 2. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event that the lower order path error crosses the preset threshold. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.138 LP_R_FIFO
Description
The LP_R_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the transmit side of the lower order path.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

402

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LP_R_FIFO alarm occurs, the service has errors.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The clock of the local NE is not synchronized with the clock of the opposite NE. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clock of the local NE is not synchronized with the clock of the opposite NE. 1. Browse current performance events, and check whether the performance event of TU pointer justification occurs on the local NE and the opposite NE. If... The TU pointer justification occurs Then... Handle the performance event. For details, see C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW. Go to Cause 2.

The TU pointer justification does not occur Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.139 LP_RDI
Description
The LP_RDI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote receive failure. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 8 of byte V5 is 1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 403

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LP_RDI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service received by the opposite NE, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote receive failure.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote receive failure. 1. Handle the lower order path alarm on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.140 LP_RDI_VC12
Description
The LP_RDI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that data reception fails at the remote end of VC-12 lower order path. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 8 of byte V5 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 404

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service received by the opposite NE, however, is interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order path.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order path. 1. Handle the alarm of the lower order path on the remote site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.141 LP_RDI_VC3
Description
The LP_RDI_VC3 alarm indicates that data reception at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path fails. A board reports this alarm when detecting that bit 5 in byte G1 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 405

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name Parameter 1

Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


When the LP_RDI_VC3 alarm occurs, the services at the local site are not affected, but the opposite site cannot receive services.

Possible Causes
The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that data reception fails at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. 1. Handle the alarm in the lower order (VC-3) path at the opposite site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.142 LP_REI
Description
The LP_REI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote error. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 3 of V5 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LP_REI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service received by the opposite NE, however, has errors.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 406

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote errors.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote errors. 1. Handle the LP_BBE performance event on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.143 LP_REI_VC12
Description
The LP_REI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that there are bit errors at the remote end of a VC-12 lower order path. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 3 of byte V5 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


Bit errors exist in the service in the receive direction of the remote site.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that there are bit errors in the lower order path.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 407

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that there are bit errors in the lower order path. 1. Handle the LPBBE performance event of the remote site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.144 LP_REI_VC3
Description
The LP_REI_VC3 alarm indicates that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. A board reports this alarm when detecting that any one of bits 1 to 4 in byte G1 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


Bit errors exist in received services at the opposite site.

Possible Causes
The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 408

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path. 1. Handle the alarm in the lower order (VC-3) path at the opposite site.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.145 LP_RFI
Description
The LP_RFI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote failure. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 4 of V5 is 1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the LP_RFI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The alarm only indicates that the lower order paths on the opposite NE cannot carry services.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote failure.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates the lower order path remote failure. 1. Handle the lower order path alarm on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 409

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.146 LP_SLM
Description
The LP_SLM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in the lower order path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a signal label mismatch between the V5 bytes.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services in the lower order path are unavailable.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site. 1. Modify the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is to be received by the local site or is to be transmitted by the remote site. Ensure that the signal labels at both ends match with each other. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.147 LP_SLM_VC12
Description
The LP_SLM_VC12 is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in the lower order path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a signal label mismatch between the V5 bytes.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 410

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


The service in this lower order path is unavailable.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does not match with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site. 1. Modify the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is to be received by the local site or is to be transmitted by the remote site. Ensure that the signal labels at both ends match with each other. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.148 LP_SLM_VC3
Description
The LP_SLM_VC3 alarm indicates that a mismatched signal label is detected in a lower order (VC-3) path. A board reports this alarm when detecting a mismatched signal label in byte C2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 411

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The services in the lower order (VC-3) path are unavailable.

Possible Causes
The signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site does not match with the signal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the opposite site.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site does not match with the signal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the opposite site. 1. Reset the signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site or the signal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the local site. Ensure that the signal labels are the same at both sites. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.149 LP_T_FIFO
Description
The LP_T_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the transmit side of the lower order path.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 412

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Bit errors occur in the services.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large. Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large. 1. Use an SDH analyzer to check whether the frequency offset of the input signal is within 50 ppm. If... The frequency offset is very large The frequency offset is within 50 ppm Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board. Then... Troubleshoot the remote site. Go to Cause 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.150 LP_TIM
Description
The LP_TIM is an alarm indicating a mismatched trace identifier is detected in the lower order path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a mismatch between the J2 bytes at both ends.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

413

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. 1. Set the byte mode of the J2 byte to be received by the local site to the disable mode. Alternatively, set the J2 byte to be received by the local site to match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.

Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes where the service travels are configured correctly. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.151 LP_TIM_VC12
Description
The LP_TIM_VC12 is an alarm indicating a mismatched trace identifier is detected in the lower order path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a mismatch between the J2 bytes at both ends.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

414

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. 1. Set the byte mode of the J2 byte to be received by the local site to the disable mode. Alternatively, set the J2 byte to be received by the local site to match with the J2 byte to be transmitted by the remote site. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.

Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes where the service travels are configured correctly. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.152 LP_TIM_VC3
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 415

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The LP_TIM_VC3 alarm indicates that a mismatched trace identifier is detected in a lower order (VC-3) path. A board reports this alarm when detecting a mismatched trace identifier in byte J1.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


None.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Byte J1 to be received at the local site does not match with byte J1 to be transmitted at the opposite site. Cause 2: The data configuration at intermediate sites is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Byte J1 to be received at the local site does not match with byte J1 to be transmitted at the opposite site. 1. Set byte J1 to be received at the local site to the disable mode or the same as byte J1 to be transmitted at the opposite site. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs. Check whether the cross-connections of intermediate sites where the services travel are configured correctly. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at intermediate sites is incorrect. 1.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 416

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.153 LP_UNEQ
Description
The LP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating that the lower order path is unequipped. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the V5 byte signal label is 0.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services in the path are unavailable. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
The data configuration is incorrect. l l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. 1. Check whether the tributary path at the remote site is configured with services. For details, see Querying TDM Services. If... Then...

The tributary path at the remote site is not Configure services for the tributary path at configured with services the remote site. The tributary path at the remote site is configured with services Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is correct. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 417

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.154 LP_UNEQ_VC12
Description
The LP_UNEQ_VC12 is an alarm indicating that the VC-12 path is unequipped. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the V5 byte signal label is 0.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.

Impact on the System


If the alarm is generated due to incorrect service configurations, the services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
The data configuration is incorrect. l l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services. 1. Check whether the tributary path at the remote site is configured with services. For details, see Querying TDM Services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 418

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The tributary path at the remote site is not configured with services

Then... Configure services.

The tributary path at the remote site is configured with services Go to Cause 2. Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is correct. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.155 LP_UNEQ_VC3
Description
The LP_UNEQ_VC3 alarm indicates that a lower order (VC-3) path is unequipped. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the C2 byte signal label is 0.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Has a fixed value of 0x01.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.

Impact on the System


The services in the path are unavailable. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching is triggered.

Possible Causes
The data configuration is incorrect.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 419

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the opposite site is not. Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is incorrect.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path at the opposite site is not. 1. Check whether the tributary path at the opposite site is configured with services. For details, see Querying TDM Services. If... The tributary path at the opposite site is not configured with services The tributary path at the opposite site is configured with services Then... Configure services. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is incorrect. 1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is correct. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.156 LPS_UNI_BI_M
Description
The LPS_UNI_BI_M is an alarm indicating that switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended) at both ends of the linear MSP do not match with each other.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 420

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Name

Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group. 0x01: linear MS protection. Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.

Impact on the System


The system performs protection switching in single-ended mode.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The linear MSP is configured incorrectly. The LPS_UNI_BI_M alarm is generated only when the following conditions are met: l l l The switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended) at the local and remote sites are different. The last three bits of the K2 byte are set to the indicated mode. The type of the protocol is set to a restructure protocol.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The linear MSP is configured incorrectly. 1. Change the MSP switching modes at both ends, and ensure that they are the same. For details, see Querying the Status of the Linear MSP.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.157 LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
Description
The LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT is an alarm indicating that the LPT closes the access port of the local NE. Upon detecting that the convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty, the LPT automatically closes the access port of the local NE. Then, the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm is reported.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

421

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Meaning Indicates the board ID. Indicates the ID of the sub-board. Indicate the port ID.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are switched to the backup network and the LPT closes the access port of the remote NE at the same time.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: The convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty. 1. Check whether the convergence port of the local NE, the access port and the convergence port of the remote NE report the ETH_LOS alarm or other alarms related to boards and optical modules. If yes, clear these alarms. Then, check whether the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm is cleared.

2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.158 LPT_INEFFECT
Description
The LPT_INEFFECT is an alarm indicating that the LPT function fails. If the user configures the LPT function but the board does not support the LPT function, the LPT_INEFFECT alarm is reported.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

422

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Meaning Indicates the ID of the IP port. Indicate the port ID. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4, Parameter 5 The values are always 0xff 0xff.

Impact on the System


When the alarm is generated, the services are not affected. If the board hardware is of a very early version, the board software automatically prevents the LPT protocol state machine from running, but reserves the LPT configuration.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The board hardware is of a very early version, and the user configures the LPT function.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board hardware is of a very early version, and the user configures the LPT function. 1. Check whether the LPT function is required. If... The LPT function is required Then... Replace the board with a board of the proper version. For details, see 6 Part Replacement.

The LPT function is not required Delete the configuration of the LPT. For details, see LPT Configuration. ----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 423

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.159 LPT_RFI
Description
The LPT_RFI is a remote failure indication of the link path through (LPT) function. This alarm occurs when the LPT function detects the failure of the remote port or the LPT service network.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the ID of the IP port.

Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the optical interface. The values are always 0x00 0x01. Parameter 4 The value is always 0xff.

Impact on the System


During the data transmission, the links are unavailable and the services are interrupted when the LPT function detects the failure of the remote port or the service network. At the same time, the backup links are enabled. If the backup links are available, the services can be restored on the backup links.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The remote port fails due to the alarms such as ETH_LOS and LSR_NO_FITED, or the remote port is disabled. Cause 2: The LPT service network is faulty. The communication link is interrupted. There are the bit error threshold-crossing alarms BIP_EXC and B3_EXC. There are the alarms such as TU_LOP, TU_AIS, VCAT_LOA, VCAT_LOM_VC12, and LP_UNEQ_VC12.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

424

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarms on the NMS, determine the board that reports the LPT_RFI alarm, and then determine the ID of the alarmed port on the board according to Parameter 1. Step 2 Cause 1: The remote port fails due to the alarms such as ETH_LOS and LSR_NO_FITED, or the remote port is disabled. 1. Check whether the corresponding opposite port is enabled. If... The opposite port is disabled The opposite port is enabled 2. Then... Enable the opposite port. Go to the next step.

Check whether any link fault alarm occurs on the line board. If... Then...

Any link fault alarm occurs Handle the link fault alarms. Focus on the R_LOS and MW_LOF alarms and handle them first. No link fault alarm occurs Go to Cause 2.

Step 3 Cause 2: The LPT service network is faulty. 1. Check whether the following alarms occur on the Ethernet boards of the MEPs at both ends. Then, handle the alarms. l ETH_LOS l LSR_NO_FITED l BIP_EXC and B3_EXC l TU_LOP, TU_AIS, VCAT_LOA, VCAT_LOM_VC12, and LP_UNEQ_VC12 ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.160 LSR_NO_FITED
Description
The LSR_NO_FITED is an alarm indicating that the SFP optical module is not installed.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 425

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The optical interface fails to carry services.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The laser of the local site is not installed. Cause 2: The optical module is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The SFP optical module of the local site is not installed. 1. Find out why the SFP optical module is not installed, and contact Huawei technical support engineers for the installation.

Step 2 Cause 2: The optical module is faulty. 1. 6.12 Replacing the SFP.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.161 LTI
Description
The LTI is an alarm indicating that the synchronization sources are lost. This alarm is reported when all the synchronization sources for the NE are lost.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning 0x01: system priority list 0x02: external clock priority list

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

426

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The clock enters the free-run mode and loses synchronization with other NE clocks.

Possible Causes
l l l l l l Cause 1: The clock configuration is incorrect. Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail. Cause 3: A fiber cut or a cable cut occurs. Cause 4: The synchronization source is set to the manual reversion mode. Cause 5: No input is available from the external clock source. Cause 6: The board is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clock configuration is incorrect. 1. Check whether the data in the clock source priority table meets the network planning requirement. For details, see Querying the Clock Synchronization Status. If... The configuration is incorrect The configuration is correct Then... Correct the configuration. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail. 1. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources based on the clock source priority table. If... The synchronization source is an external clock The synchronization source is a line clock The synchronization source is an IF clock The synchronization source is a tributary clock The synchronization source is an Ethernet clock Step 3 Cause 3: A fiber cut or a cable cut occurs. 1. 1. Connect the fiber or cable properly. See Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source, and set the clock source to the automatic reversion mode. Step 4 Cause 4: The synchronization source is set to the manual reversion mode. Then... Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm. Handle the alarm that occurs on the line board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributary board. Handle the alarm that occurs on the Ethernet board.

Step 5 Cause 5: No input is available from the external clock source. 1. See Configuring Clock Sources for External Clock Output, and configure the clock source that provides external clock signals.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 427

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 6 Cause 6: The board is faulty. 1. Replace the board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.162 MAC_EXT_EXC
Description
The MAC_EXT_EXC alarm indicates that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the threshold crossing type. l 0x01: ETHDROP threshold crossing l 0x02: ETHEXCCOL threshold crossing l 0x03: RXBBAD threshold crossing

Impact on the System


When the MAC_EXT_EXC alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: ETHDROP threshold crossing. The number of packet loss events crosses the upper threshold.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 428

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 2: ETHEXCCOL threshold crossing. The number of frames unsuccessfully transmitted after successive collisions crosses the upper threshold. Cause 3: RXBBAD threshold crossing. The number of bytes in received bad packets crosses the upper threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends are the same. 1. On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends. If... Then...

The ports at the transmit and receive Set the working modes of the ports at the ends work in different modes or in half- transmit and receive ends to full-duplex or duplex mode auto-negotiation. Ensure that the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends are the same. For details, see Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports. The ports at the transmit and receive Go to the next step. ends work in the same mode and neither port works in half-duplex mode. Step 2 Handle the problem that the opposite site transmits packets abnormally. Step 3 Handle the quality problem with the transmission line. Check whether the local end reports alarms such as ETH_LOS as the external line is damaged or over attenuated. If yes, see the related handling method to clear the alarms. Step 4 Replace the faulty board. ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.163 MAC_FCS_EXC
Description
The MAC_FCS_EXC alarm indicates that the software detects that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crosses the threshold. The software periodically detects the number of bytes received by the MAC chip and the number of bytes that have bit errors. The MAC_FCS_EXC alarm is reported when the number of bit errors crosses the threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Alarm Type Communication alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

429

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the MAC_FCS_EXC alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The performance of the line signals degrades. Cause 2: The input optical power is abnormal. Cause 3: A fiber connector is dirty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The performance of the line signals degrades. 1. 2. On the NMS, check for a LOOP_ALM alarm. If there is any, clear it. For details, see 8.5 Software Loopback. If the LOOP_ALM alarm persists, check whether the NMS is under a denial-of-service (DOS) attack. If yes, eliminate the source that transmits a large amount of invalid data, and then check whether the LOOP_ALM alarm is cleared. If the LOOP_ALM alarm persists, check whether a cable or fiber is faulty. Replace the faulty cable or fiber, and then check whether the LOOP_ALM alarm is cleared. Check whether the alarmed port reports an IN_PWR_ABN alarm as well. If there is any, clear the IN_PWR_ABN alarm. Clean the fiber connector and the optical receive port. For details, see 8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters.

3.

Step 2 Cause 2: The input optical power is abnormal. 1. 2. 1.

Step 3 Cause 3: A fiber connector is dirty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.164 MOD_COM_FAIL
Description
The MOD_COM_FAIL is an alarm indicating that Module communicates abnormally.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Equipment alarm

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

430

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 0x11 indicates that the communication between the system control unit and packet switching unit is failed.

Impact on the System


The related operations cannot be performed by using the NMS and the performance information of each module cannot be queried.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The software processing of the related modules of the board is faulty. Cause 2: The board hardware is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The software processing of the related modules of the board is faulty. 1. 2. Perform a cold reset on the faulty board by using the NMS. For details, refer to 8.6.1 Cold Reset. remove the faulty board and insert it again.

Step 2 Cause 2: The board hardware is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty board. For details, refer to 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.165 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
Description
The MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH alarm indicates that a mismatched port module is detected.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

431

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Maloperation

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Meaning

Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicates that the alarm is reported by port 1.

Impact on the System


The services at the alarmed port are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The preset type of the SFP module is different from the actual type of the SFP module.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The preset type of the SFP module is different from the actual type of the SFP module. 1. 2. Find out the port that reports the alarm according to the alarm parameters. Check whether the preset type of the SFP module is the same as the actual type of the SFP module. If... Then...

The preset type of the SFP module is the Replace the optical/electrical SFP same as the actual type of the SFP module module. Ensure that the new SFP module is of the correct type. The preset type of the SFP module is Reset the type of the SFP module. different from the actual type of the SFP module ----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

432

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.166 MPLS_PW_BDI
Description
The MPLS_PW_BDI is an alarm of PW backward defect indication. This alarm occurs when the local NE receives the BDI packet, notifying that the remote NE detects that the PW is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the transmit side of the local NE are faulty.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE detects that the PW is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE detects that the PW is faulty. If... A board on the remote NE is reset or faulty The physical link between the local NE and the remote NE is faulty The bandwidth allocated to the PW is fully occupied. ----End Then... Rectify the fault on the remote NE. Rectify the fault on the physical link. Increase the bandwidth of the PW.

Related Information
None.

A.3.167 MPLS_PW_Excess
Description
The MPLS_PW_Excess is an alarm indicating that excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received on the PW. This alarm occurs when five or more correct CV/FFD packets are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 433

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services may be interrupted if excessive redundant packets are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID. 1. 2. 3. Check whether multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID. If yes, delete the redundant PWs or change the PW ID and label of each PW to unique values. Then, check whether the alarm clears. If... The alarm clears The alarm persists Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. 2. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected. If yes, rectify the fault. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.168 MPLS_PW_LOCV
Description
The MPLS_PW_LOCV is an alarm of PW connectivity loss. This alarm occurs when no expected CV/FFD packets are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 434

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l l l Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets. Cause 2: The OAM is different between the ends of the PW. Cause 3: The PW that carries services is faulty. Cause 4: The remote NE of the PW is faulty. Cause 5: The service interface is configured incorrectly. Cause 6: Serious congestion occurs on the network.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets. 1. Check whether the remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets. If... The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets The remote NE of the PW keeps transmitting CV/FFD packets Then... Enable the CV/FFD detection and then check whether the alarm clears. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The OAM is different between the ends of the PW. 1. Check whether the OAM is different between the ends of the PW. If no, Setting PW OAM Parameters according to the plan. If yes, go to cause 3. Check whether the local NE and remote NE of the PW report any alarm related to boards. If yes, clear the alarm. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. Check whether any link-related alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Step 3 Cause 3: The PW that carries services is faulty. 1. 2.

Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.


435

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Step 4 Cause 4: The remote NE of the PW is faulty. 1. Check whether the interconnected board of the remote NE reports the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. If yes, the board is being reset. Clear the COMMUN_FAIL alarm and then check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If the interconnected board of the remote NE reports other alarms, clear these alarms. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 5.

2.

Step 5 Cause 5: The service interface is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. Check whether the service interface is configured correctly according to service planning. If not, reconfigure the service interface. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 6.

Step 6 Cause 6: Serious congestion occurs on the network. 1. 2. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty tunnel is fully occupied. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.169 MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
Description
The MPLS_PW_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the PW do not match with the specified one. This alarm occurs when only the packets with wrong TTSIs are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 436

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


Services are interrupted or the packets from other PWs are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The ingress node or egress node of the faulty PW is configured incorrectly. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ingress node or egress node of the faulty PW is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. Check whether the ingress node and egress node of the faulty PW are configured correctly according to NE planning. If the ingress node or egress node is configured incorrectly, correct the configuration and then check whether the alarm clears.

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. 2. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected. If yes, rectify the fault.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.170 MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
Description
The MPLS_PW_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged on the PW. This alarm is reported if the CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs and those with wrong TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services are interrupted or the packets from other PWs are received.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 437

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The PW is configured incorrectly. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The PW is configured incorrectly. 1. 2. Check whether the PW are configured correctly according to NE planning. If the PW is configured incorrectly, correct the configuration and then check whether the alarm clears.

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. 2. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected. If yes, rectify the fault.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.171 MPLS_PW_SD
Description
The MPLS_PW_SD is an alarm of signal degrade on the PW. This alarm is reported when the packet loss rate of the connectivity check (CC) crosses the SD threshold but is lower than the SF threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services degrade and moderate packet loss occurs.

Possible Causes
l l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 438

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. 1. 2. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty PW is fully occupied. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_SD alarm is cleared. Check whether the fiber connector is loose. If yes, insert the fiber connector securely. Clean the fiber connector or the optical module. For details, see Checking and cleaning fiber connectors.

Step 2 Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. 1. 1. Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.172 MPLS_PW_SF
Description
The MPLS_PW_SF is an alarm of signal failure on the PW. This alarm occurs when the number of received connectivity check (CC) packets is less than the signal failure (SF) threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services fail and severe packet loss occurs.

Possible Causes
l l l Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied. Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 439

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

1. 2.

Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty PW is fully occupied. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_SF alarm is cleared.

Step 2 Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss. 1. Check whether the fiber connector is loose. If yes, insert the fiber connector securely.

Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty. 1. Clean the fiber connector or the optical module. For details, see Checking and cleaning fiber connectors.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.173 MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
Description
The MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN is an alarm of unknown defects on the PW. This alarm occurs when the connectivity check (CC) packets of unexpected types, periods, and values are received within three consecutive periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


PW OAM fails.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The PW OAM configuration at the two ends is different.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The PW OAM configuration at the two ends is different. 1. Change the PW OAM configuration to the same at the two ends.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 440

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.174 MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI is an alarm of tunnel backward defect indication. This alarm occurs when the port of the local NE receives the backward defect indication (BDI) packet, notifying that the opposite NE detects that the tunnel is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services on the local NE is normal.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The opposite NE detects MPLS alarms.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE detects MPLS alarms. 1. Clear the MPLS alarms reported on the opposite NE.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.175 MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess is an alarm indicating that excessive trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are received in the tunnel. This alarm occurs when the Ethernet port of the local NE receives five or more correct CV/FFD packets within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 441

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services may be interrupted if excessive redundant packets are received.

Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Physical links are misconnected. 1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. If yes, reconnect the fiber or cable.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.176 MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI is an alarm of tunnel forward defect indication. This alarm is reported when the local NE receives the forward defect indication (FDI) packet, notifying that the upstream tunnel at the physical layer is faulty.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services may be interrupted.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 442

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The upstream NE detects that the physical link that carries the tunnel is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The upstream NE detects that the physical link that carries the tunnel is faulty. If... The link-related alarms, such as MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR and MW_LOF, are reported The transmit board of the local NE reports hardware-related alarms (alarms on the optical modules or boards), such as HARD_BAD and LSR_NO_FITED ----End Then... Clear these alarms first.

Clear these alarms first.

Related Information
None.

A.3.177 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV is an alarm of tunnel connectivity loss. This alarm occurs when the port of the local NE fails to receive expected CV/FFD packets within three CV/FFD periods. (The expected CV/FFD packets must carry correct TTSIs and have the correct type, period, and value.)

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the services that the faulty tunnel carries are interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause 1: In detection mode of manual, the MPLS OAM settings, such as detection packet type and detection packet period, differ at the two ends. Cause 2: Severe congestion occurs on the network.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 443

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

l l

Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. Cause 4: The physical link between the two ends is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: In detection mode of manual, the MPLS OAM settings, such as detection packet type and detection packet period, differ at the two ends. 1. 2. Check whether the MPLS OAM settings are the same at the two ends. If the MPLS OAM settings are different at the two ends, change them to the same. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: Severe congestion occurs on the network. 1. If the alarm persists, check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty tunnel is fully used. If the bandwidth of the faulty tunnel is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Step 3 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty. 1. Check whether the remote NE reports the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. If yes, you can infer that the remote NE is being reset. Wait until the COMMUN_FAIL alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists 2. 3. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to the next step. Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 3.

Check whether the local NE and the remote NE report alarms related to optical modules or boards, such as HARD_BAD and LSR_NO_FITED. If yes, clear these alarms first. Then, check whether the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV alarm clears. If... The alarm is cleared The alarm persists Then... End the alarm handling. Go to Cause 4.

Step 4 Cause 4: The physical link between the two ends is faulty. 1. Check whether any fiber or cable is damaged. If yes, replace the damaged fiber or cable.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 444

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.178 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) on the tunnel do not match with the specified one. This alarm is reported if no CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted or packets from other tunnels are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The tunnel settings are incorrect. For example, the LSR IDs or tunnel IDs differ at the two ends of the tunnel. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tunnel settings are incorrect. For example, the LSR IDs or tunnel IDs differ at the two ends of the tunnel. 1. Check whether the tunnel settings are the same at the two ends. l If the source NE is an ingress node, Sink Node is the LSR ID of the sink NE. If the sink NE is an egress node, Source Node is the LSR ID of the source NE. l Tunnel IDs of the source NE and sink NE of a tunnel must be set to the same. 2. If the tunnel IDs are different, change them to the same.

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. If yes, connect the fiber or cable properly.

----End

Related Information
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 445

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.179 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged in the tunnel. This alarm is reported if the CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs and those with wrong TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the packets from other tunnels are received.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. 1. 2. Check whether multiple tunnels are configured with the same label. If multiple tunnels are configured with the same label, delete the redundant labels or change the label of each tunnel to a unique value.

Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected. 1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. If yes, connect the fiber or cable properly.

----End

Related Information
On the NE, the label of each MPLS tunnel is unique.

A.3.180 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 446

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL is an alarm indicating that the OAM protocol negotiation between the two ends of the tunnel fails.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, services are switched to the backup network and the LPT closes the access port of the remote NE at the same time.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing on one end and is disabled on the other end. Cause 2: The tunnel is unavailable when the OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing on one end and is disabled on the other end. 1. Enable the OAM function. Step 2 Cause 2: The tunnel is unavailable when the OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing. 1. 2. Check whether the sink node of the alarmed tunnel reports the HARD_BAD, ETH_LOS, or R_LOS alarm. If yes, clear the alarm. After the OAM protocol negotiation succeeds, the MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL alarm clears.

----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

447

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.181 MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_SD is an alarm of signal degrade on the tunnel. This alarm is reported when the packet loss rate of the CV/FFD crosses the SD threshold but is lower than the SF threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


Services degrade and moderate packet loss occurs.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. 1. 2. Check whether the FCS_ERR alarm is reported. If yes, clear the FCS_ERR alarm and then check whether the MPLS_TUNNEL_SD alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists, proceed to cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. 1. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel is fully used. If the bandwidth of the faulty tunnel is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data. Check whether the alarm clears.

----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

448

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.182 MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_SF is an alarm indicating that the tunnel signal degrades severely. This alarm is reported if the loss ratio of the CV/FFD packets is higher than the SF threshold and CV/ FFD packets are received in three consecutive periods.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the quality of service degrades severely and a large number of packets are lost.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur. 1. 2. On the NMS, check whether the FCS_ERR alarm is reported. If yes, clear the FCS_ERR, and then check whether the MPLS_TUNNEL_SF is cleared. If the MPLS_TUNNEL_SF persists, go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. 1. On the NMS, check whether the bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. If the bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used, increase the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data. Check whether the alarm is cleared.

----End

Related Information
None.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

449

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

A.3.183 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN is an alarm indicating that certain unknown defects exist on the tunnel. This alarm is reported when the port receives the CV packets and the FFD packets.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When this alarm occurs, the OAM function is affected.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The OAM settings differ at the two ends. Cause 2: The NE receives packets from an unknown source.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The OAM settings differ at the two ends. 1. 2. If the MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm is reported transiently, check whether Tunnel OAM configuration is changed on the local NE and the opposite NE. If the local NE and the opposite NE have different Tunnel OAM configuration, the MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm is reported transiently and then the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV alarm is reported. Ensure that both ends have the same Tunnel OAM configuration. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.

Step 2 Cause 2: The NE receives packets from an unknown source. 1. 2. Check whether there is any service configured between the NE and an unknown source, or whether the NE is connected to an unknown source. If yes, modify the incorrect configuration or reconnect the fibers.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.184 MS_AIS
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 450

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Description
The MS_AIS is an alarm indicating multiplex section alarms. This alarm is reported when the board detects that bits 6-8 of the K2 byte in the three consecutive frames are 111.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Major Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the line port are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Cause 2: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. 1. Replace the line board at the opposite site based on the type of the alarmed board. If... The line board reports the alarm The IF board reports the alarm 2. Then... Replace the line board at the opposite end. Replace the IF board at the opposite end.

Replace the board and then check whether the alarm is cleared. If... The alarm is cleared after the board replacement The alarm persists after the board replacement Then... End the fault handling. Go to the next step.

3.

Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board at the opposite end. If... The alarm is cleared after the board replacement The alarm persists after the board replacement Then... End the fault handling. Go to Cause 2.

Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. 1. Replace the alarmed board.

----End
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 451

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Related Information
None.

A.3.185 MS_CROSSTR
Description
The MS_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a performance indicator of the multiplex section crosses the threshold. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 2 is always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm and has the following meanings: l 0x10: MSBBE l 0x11: MSES l 0x12: MSSES l 0x13: MSFEBBE l 0x14: MSFEES l 0x15: MSFESES l 0x16: MSUAS l 0x17: MSCSES l 0x18: MSFECSES l 0x21: MSFEUAS
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 452

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


A large number of bit errors occur in the services, and the services may be interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time. Cause 2: The MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time.
NOTE

Handle the alarm as follows if the value of parameter 3 is 0x16:

1. 2.

Check whether fibers are properly connected. If not, connect the fibers again according to planning information. Check whether cross-connections are configured for service ports. If not, configure crossconnections again according to planning information.

Step 2 Cause 2: The MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold. 1. Check the threshold crossing records of MS BER performance events to find out the performance event that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.

2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.186 MS_RDI
Description
The MS_RDI is an alarm indicating that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails. This alarm is reported when the board detects that bits 6-8 of the K2 byte are 110.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 453

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


The services on the local site are not affected. The services received by the opposite station, however, are interrupted.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicates that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicates that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails. 1. Rectify the fault that occurs on the opposite station. The possible alarms are as follows: l MS_AIS l R_LOS l R_LOF l B2_EXC l B2_SD ----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.187 MS_REI
Description
The MS_REI is an alarm indicating that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the M1 byte is non-zero.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Warning Alarm Type Communication alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The services on the local site are not affected. The services received by the opposite station, however, has bit errors.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 454

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicates that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicates that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section. 1. Handle the MS_BBE performance event on the port of the opposite station.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.188 MSAD_CROSSTR
Description
The MSAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the adaptation performance indicator of the multiplex section crosses the threshold. This alarm is reported when the board detects that an AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1 Meaning Indicates the performance monitoring period: l 0x01: 15 minutes l 0x02: 24 hours Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm. l 0x2a: AUPJCHIGH l 0x2b: AUPJCLOW l 0x2c: AUPJCNEW
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 455

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Impact on the System


Bit errors may occur in the services.

Possible Causes
Cause 1: An AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold. 1. Check the threshold crossing records of the AU pointer adaptation performance events to find out the performance event that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records. Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.

2.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.189 MULTI_RPL_OWNER
Description
The MULTI_RPL_OWNER is an alarm indicating that the ring network contains several RPL_OWNER nodes.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Processing alarm

Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the Alarm Details field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example, Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the following table. Name Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Meaning Indicate the ID of the ERPS instance.

Impact on the System


The ERPS protection fails and the services configured on the Ethernet ring are interrupted.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 456

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Possible Causes
Cause 1: The related data is configured incorrectly.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The related data is configured incorrectly. 1. Reconfigure the ERPS protection. For details, see Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances.

----End

Related Information
The following table describes the meanings of the parameters in the MULTI_RPL_OWNER alarm reported by the EMS6. Name Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Parameter 5, Parameter 6 Meaning Indicates the port ID. Indicate the ID of the ERPS instance.

A.3.190 MW_AM_TEST
Description
The MW_AM_TEST is an alarm indicating that the IF port is in the AM testing state.

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Other alarms

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


The transmission capacity is reduced during the AM test.

Possible Causes
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Cause: The AM testing is enabled.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 457

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The AM testing is enabled. 1. After the AM testing ends, disable the AM testing.

----End

Related Information
None.

A.3.191 MW_BER_EXC
Description
The MW_BER_EXC is an alarm indicating that excessive bit errors occur on the radio link. This alarm is reported when the bit errors on the radio link exceed the specified threshold (10-3 by default).

Attribute
Alarm Severity Minor Alarm Type Service alarm

Parameters
None.

Impact on the System


When the MW_BER_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the port is interrupted.

Possible Causes
l l l l Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty. Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty. Cause 4: An interference event occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy. 1. At the local end, check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal. If yes, determine the abnormality and take proper measures. For details, see Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 458

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide (U2000)

A Alarm Reference

If... The RSL is lower than the receiver sensitivity

Then... Follow the steps: 1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensure that the azimuth of the antenna meets the requirement. 2. Check the antenna direction. Check whether the received signal is from the main lobe. If the antenna direction does not meet the requirement, adjust the antenna in a wide range. 3. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antenna is correct. Adjust the incorrect polarization direction. 4. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the specifications. Replace the antennas that do not meet the requirement. 5. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction. If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planning design, hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle.

The RSL is higher than the specified RSL of the network. The offset value is tens of decibels. The duration is from tens of secon